US7091230B2 - 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders - Google Patents

2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US7091230B2
US7091230B2 US10/470,954 US47095403A US7091230B2 US 7091230 B2 US7091230 B2 US 7091230B2 US 47095403 A US47095403 A US 47095403A US 7091230 B2 US7091230 B2 US 7091230B2
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
alkyl
optionally substituted
dipropyl
compound
trifluoromethyl
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Fee Related, expires
Application number
US10/470,954
Other versions
US20040092596A1 (en
Inventor
Alan D. Adams
A. Brian Jones
Joel P. Berger
James F. Dropinski
Alexander Elbrecht
Kun Liu
Karen Lamb MacNaul
Guo-Qiang Shi
Derek J. Von Langen
Gaochao Zhou
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Merck Sharp and Dohme LLC
Original Assignee
Merck and Co Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Merck and Co Inc filed Critical Merck and Co Inc
Priority to US10/470,954 priority Critical patent/US7091230B2/en
Publication of US20040092596A1 publication Critical patent/US20040092596A1/en
Assigned to MERCK & CO., INC. reassignment MERCK & CO., INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: ADAMS, ALAN D., BERGER, JOEL P., DROPINSKI, JAMES F., ELBRECHT, ALEXANDER, LIU, KUN, MACNAUI, KAREN LAMB, SHI, GUO-QIANG, VON LANGEN, DEREK J., ZHOU, GAOCHAO, JONES, A. BRIAN
Priority to US11/334,152 priority patent/US7495020B2/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of US7091230B2 publication Critical patent/US7091230B2/en
Assigned to MERCK SHARP & DOHME CORP. reassignment MERCK SHARP & DOHME CORP. CHANGE OF NAME (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MERCK & CO., INC.
Adjusted expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Fee Related legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D257/00Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having four nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D257/02Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having four nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms not condensed with other rings
    • C07D257/04Five-membered rings
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/18Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for pancreatic disorders, e.g. pancreatic enzymes
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06Antipsoriatics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/06Antihyperlipidemics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A61P5/24Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the sex hormones
    • A61P5/28Antiandrogens
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/12Antihypertensives
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C59/00Compounds having carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and containing any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, groups, groups, or groups
    • C07C59/40Unsaturated compounds
    • C07C59/76Unsaturated compounds containing keto groups
    • C07C59/90Unsaturated compounds containing keto groups containing singly bound oxygen-containing groups
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/24Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/54Radicals substituted by carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C07D213/55Acids; Esters
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D261/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,2-oxazole rings
    • C07D261/20Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,2-oxazole rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D263/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings
    • C07D263/02Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D263/30Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D263/32Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D263/00Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings
    • C07D263/52Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-oxazole or hydrogenated 1,3-oxazole rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D263/54Benzoxazoles; Hydrogenated benzoxazoles
    • C07D263/58Benzoxazoles; Hydrogenated benzoxazoles with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached in position 2
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D413/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D413/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D413/12Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/12Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links

Definitions

  • the instant invention is concerned with 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs thereof which are useful as therapeutic compounds, particularly in the treatment and prevention of Type 2 diabetes mellitus, often referred to as non-insulin dependent diabetes (NIDDM), of conditions that are often associated with this disease, and of lipid disorders.
  • NIDDM non-insulin dependent diabetes
  • type 1 diabetes or insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (IDDM)
  • IDDM insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus
  • NIDDM noninsulin dependent diabetes mellitus
  • Insulin resistance is not primarily due to a diminished number of insulin receptors but to a post-insulin receptor binding defect that is not yet understood. This resistance to insulin responsiveness results in insufficient insulin activation of glucose uptake, oxidation and storage in muscle and inadequate insulin repression of lipolysis in adipose tissue and of glucose production and secretion in the liver.
  • the biguanides increase insulin sensitivity resulting in some correction of hyperglycemia.
  • the two biguanides, phenformin and metformin can induce lactic acidosis and nausea/diarrhea, respectively.
  • the glitazones i.e. 5-benzylthiazolidine-2,4-diones
  • 5-benzylthiazolidine-2,4-diones are a more recently described class of compounds with potential for a novel mode of action in ameliorating many symptoms of type 2 diabetes.
  • These agents substantially increase insulin sensitivity in muscle, liver and adipose tissue in several animal models of type 2 diabetes resulting in partial or complete correction of the elevated plasma levels of glucose without occurrence of hypoglycemia.
  • disorders of lipid metabolism or dyslipidemias include various conditions characterized by abnormal concentrations of one or more lipids (i.e. cholesterol and triglycerides), and/or apolipoproteins (i.e., apolipoproteins A, B, C and E), and/or lipoproteins (i.e., the macromolecular complexes formed by the lipid and the apolipoprotein that allow lipids to circulate in blood, such as Low Density Lipoproteins (LDL), Very Low Density Lipoproteins (VLDL) and Intermediate Density Lipoproteins (IDL).
  • LDL Low Density Lipoproteins
  • VLDL Very Low Density Lipoproteins
  • IDL Intermediate Density Lipoproteins
  • LDL Low Density Lipoproteins
  • HDL High Density Lipoproteins
  • HDL High Density Lipoproteins
  • An example of an HDL raising agent is nicotinic acid, a drug with limited utility because doses that achieve HDL raising are associated with undesirable effects, such as flushing.
  • Dyslipidemias were originally classified by Fredrickson according to the combination of alterations mentioned above.
  • the Fredrickson classification includes 6 phenotypes (i.e., I, IIa, IIb, III, IV and V) with the most common being the isolated hypercholesterolemia (or type IIa) which is usually accompained by elevated concentrations of total and LDL cholesterol.
  • the initial treatment for hypercholesterolemia is often to modify the diet to one low in fat and cholesterol, coupled with appropriate physical exercise, followed by drug therapy when LDL-lowering goals are not met by diet and exercise alone
  • a second common form of dyslipidemia is the mixed or combined hyperlipidemia or type IIb and III of the Fredrickson classification.
  • This dyslipidemia is often prevalent in patients with type 2 diabetes, obesity and the metabolic syndrome.
  • this dyslipidemia there are modest elevations of LDL-cholesterol, accompanied by more pronounced elevations of small dense LDL-cholesterol particles, VLDL and/or IDL (i.e., triglyceride rich lipoproteins), and total triglycerides.
  • concentrations of HDL are often low.
  • Peroxisome proliferators are a structurally diverse group of compounds that when administered to rodents elicit dramatic increases in the size and number of hepatic and renal peroxisomes, as well as concomitant increases in the capacity of peroxisomes to metabolize fatty acids via increased expression of the enzymes of the beta-oxidation cycle.
  • Compounds of this group include but are not limited to the fibrate class of lipid modulating drugs, herbicides and phthalate plasticizers.
  • Peroxisome proliferation is also triggered by dietary or physiological factors such as a high-fat diet and cold acclimatization.
  • PPAR peroxisome proliferator activated receptor alpha
  • PPAR ⁇ peroxisome proliferator activated receptor gamma
  • PPAR ⁇ peroxisome proliferator activated receptor delta
  • PPAR ⁇ is also associated with the activity of fibrates and fatty acids in rodents and humans.
  • Fibric acid derivatives such as clofibrate, fenofibrate, bezafibrate, ciprofibrate, beclofibrate and etofibrate, as well as gemfibrozil, each of which are PPAR ⁇ ligands and/or activators, produce a substantial reduction in plasma triglycerides as well as some increase in HDL.
  • the effects on LDL cholesterol are inconsistent and might depend upon the compound and/or the dyslipidemic phenotype. For these reasons, this class of compounds has been primarily used to treat hypertriglyceridemia (i.e, Fredrickson Type IV and V) and/or mixed hyperlipidemia.
  • the PPAR ⁇ receptor subtypes are involved in activating the program of adipocyte differentiation and are not involved in stimulating peroxisome proliferation in the liver.
  • the DNA sequences for the human isotypes are described in Elbrecht, et al., BBRC 224;431–437 (1996).
  • PPAR ⁇ 2 is expressed specifically in fat cells. Tontonoz et al., Cell 79: 1147–1156 (1994) provide evidence to show that one physiological role of PPAR ⁇ 2 is to induce adipocyte differentiation.
  • PPAR ⁇ 2 regulates the expression of genes through interaction with other proteins and binding to hormone response elements, for example in the 5′ flanking regions of responsive genes.
  • An example of a PPAR ⁇ 2 responsive gene is the tissue-specific adipocyte P2 gene.
  • peroxisome proliferators including the fibrates and fatty acids, activate the transcriptional activity of PPAR's, only prostaglandin J 2 derivatives have been identified as potential natural ligands of the PPAR ⁇ subtype, which also binds thiazolidinedione antidiabetic agents with high affinity.
  • PPAR ⁇ The human nuclear receptor gene PPAR ⁇ (hPPAR ⁇ ) has been cloned from a human osteosarcoma cell cDNA library and is fully described in A. Schmidt et al., Molecular Endocrinology , 6 :1634–1641 (1992). It should be noted that PPAR ⁇ is also referred to in the literature as PPAR ⁇ and as NUC1, and each of these names refers to the same receptor; in Schmidt et al. the receptor is referred to as NUC1.
  • hNUC1B a human PPAR subtype, hNUC1B.
  • the amino acid sequence of hNUC1B differs from human PPAR ⁇ (referred to therein as hNUC1) by one amino acid, i.e., alanine at position 292.
  • hNUC1B protein represses hPPAR ⁇ and thyroid hormone receptor protein activity.
  • WO97/28149 It has been disclosed in WO97/28149 that agonists of PPAR ⁇ are useful in raising HDL plasma levels.
  • WO97/27857, 97/28115, 97/28137 and 97/27847 disclose compounds that are useful as antidiabetic, antiobesity, anti-atherosclerosis and antihyperlipidemic agents, and which may exert their effect through activation of PPARs.
  • glitazones exert their effects by binding to the peroxisome proliferator activated receptor (PPAR) family of receptors, controlling certain transcription elements having to do with the biological entities listed above.
  • PPAR peroxisome proliferator activated receptor
  • PPAR ⁇ agonists should improve the lipid profile and alleviate dyslipidemias by reducing elevated LDL levels and elevated triglyceride levels and/or increasing HDL levels.
  • PPAR ⁇ agonists should improve insulin sensitivity, reducing the need for insulin injections in patients with NIDDM. The role of PPAR ⁇ is less well defined.
  • the class of compounds described herein is novel. Structurally similar kinds of compounds have been synthesized and invesigated for other uses, particularly as angiotensin II antagonists. A few related classes of compounds have also been reported to be modulators of arichidonic acid pathways (U.S. Pat. No. 4,748,272), to activate fatty acid oxidation in rats (S. M. Rangwala et al., Chirality (1997), 9, 37–47), or to have at least some hypoglycemic activity (T. C. Asthana et al., Indian J. Chem. (1970), 8, 1086–1095, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,748,272 and 6,110,963). These classes of compounds appear to have relatively low activity or to modulate glucose metabolism by a different mechanism than the compounds described herein (e.g. PTP-1B antagonism).
  • the class of compounds described herein is a new class of PPAR agonists.
  • the compounds in this class do not contain a 1,3-thiazolidinedione moiety in their molecular structure and therefore are not glitazones.
  • This class of compounds includes compounds that are primarily PPAR ⁇ agonists, compounds that are mixed PPAR ⁇ / ⁇ agonists, and to a lesser extent, compounds that are primarily PPAR ⁇ agonists.
  • the clinical effects are expected to vary depending on the balance in agonism of the PPAR-subtypes.
  • These compounds are useful in the treatment, control and/or prevention of diabetes, hyperglycemia, mixed or diabetic dyslipidemia, and other lipid disorders (including isolated hypercholesterolemia as manifested by elevations in LDL-C and/or non-HDL-C and/or hyperapoBliproteinemia, hypertriglyceridemia and/or increase in triglyceride-rich-lipoproteins, and/or low HDL cholesterol concentrations), atherosclerosis, obesity, vascular restenosis, inflammatory conditions, neoplastic conditions, and other PPAR ⁇ and/or ⁇ mediated diseases, disorders and conditions.
  • lipid disorders including isolated hypercholesterolemia as manifested by elevations in LDL-C and/or non-HDL-C and/or hyperapoBliproteinemia, hypertriglyceridemia and/or increase in triglyceride-rich-lipoproteins, and/or low HDL cholesterol concentrations
  • atherosclerosis obesity
  • vascular restenosis inflammatory conditions
  • the present invention provides compounds having the structure of Formula I, including pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs of these compounds:
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of (a) halogen, (b) C 1-6 alkyl, where alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F, and (c) —OC 1 –C 6 alkyl, where —OC 1 –C 6 alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens, independently selected from Cl and F, with the proviso that R 1 and R 2 are not both CH 3 , further provided that if R 1 is Cl and R3 is C 4 alkyl, then R 7 is not 4-chlorophenoxy, and further provided that if R 1 or R 2 is propyl and R 3 is acetyl, then the other of R 1 and R 2 is not methyl;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of C 1 –C 6 alkyl and C 3 –C 12 Alicyclic, wherein alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F, and Alicyclic is optionally substituted with 1–5 halogens;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of C 2 –C 6 alkyl, —C(O)C 1 –C 6 alkyl, —C(O)Aryl, —C(O)C 3 –C 12 Alicyclic, —C(O)Heterocycle, —C(O)Heteroaryl, —OC 1-6 alkyl, —OAryl, —OHeterocycle, and —OHeteroaryl, wherein alkyl in all occurrences may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from (a) 1–5 Cl and/or F atoms and/or (b) one Aryl or Heteroaryl; and wherein Aryl, Heterocycle, and Heteroaryl are optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of Cl, F, Br, linear or branched C 1 –C 5 alkyl optionally substituted with 1–5 halogens, Aryl optionally substituted
  • —R 4 is selected from the group consisting of H, —OH, —OC 1 –C 6 -alkyl, —OHeterocycle, —OHeteroaryl, and halogen, wherein —Oalkyl may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens independently selected from F and Cl, and wherein Heterocycle and Heteroaryl are optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from Cl, F, Br, C 1 –C 5 alkyl and —OC 1 –C 5 alkyl, where C 1 –C 5 alkyl and —OC 1 –C 5 alkyl may be linear or branched and optionally may be substituted with 1–5 halogens independently selected from Cl and F; or optionally,
  • R 3 and R 4 may be joined together to yield a 5- or 6-membered ring containing (a) 1–3 heteroatoms selected from O, N and S, (b) 2–5 carbon atoms, and (c) optionally one carbonyl group, wherein the 5- or 6-membered ring is fused to the benzene ring, and the benzene ring and fused 5- or 6-membered ring together form a Heteroaryl or Heterocycle which optionally contains one carbonyl group in the 5- or 6-membered fused ring and which is optionally substituted on the 5- or 6-membered fused ring with 1–2 substituents independently selected from R 8 ;
  • R 5 is H or Halogen
  • R 6 is selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, CH 3 and CF 3 ;
  • Each R 7 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, C 1 –C 6 alkyl, C 1 –C 6 alkoxy, —SC 1-6 alkyl, —OAryl, C 2 –C 6 alkenyl, C 2 –C 6 alkynyl, —CN, —C(O)OC 1 –C 3 alkyl, and —C(O)C 1 –C 3 alkyl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy and alkynyl and each alkyl portion of a substituent is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–5 halogen atoms and/or 1 substituent selected form Aryl and Heteroaryl, and each Aryl and Heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1–3 groups independently selected from halogen, CH 3 , CF 3 , —OCH 3 and —OCF 3 ;
  • Each R 8 is independently selected from the group consisting of (a) —OC 1 –C 5 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 F; (b) C 1 –C 9 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with one Aryl, 1–5 halogens independently selected from Cl and F, and/or one —COOH; (c) Aryl; and (d) Heteroaryl; wherein Aryl and Heteroaryl are optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of Cl, F, C 1 –C 5 alkyl, and —OC 1 –C 5 alkyl, wherein each alkyl and each —OC 1 –C 5 alkyl may be linear or branched, and is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen —OCH 3 , and —OCF 3 ;
  • Aryl is an aromatic carbocyclic mono- or bicyclic ring system containing 6–10 atoms in the ring or rings;
  • Heteroaryl is a mono- or bicyclic aromatic ring system containing 4–11 atoms in the ring or rings, wherein at least one atom in the ring or rings is a heteroatom selected from N, O and S;
  • Heterocycle is a fully or partially saturated monocyclic or bicyclic ring system having 4–11 atoms in the ring or rings and at least one heteroatom selected from O, N, and S in the ring or rings;
  • Alicyclic is a substituent group that has one C 3 –C 6 cycloalkyl and one or more alkyl groups which may be linear or branched attached to the cycloalkyl group, wherein the point of attachment may be through the cycloalkyl or through an alkyl group;
  • Ar 1 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl and pyridyl, and is optionally substituted with Aryl or 1–3 groups independently selected from R 7 ;
  • X is O or S
  • Z is selected from the group consisting of —COOH, tetrazole, and —C(O)NHS(O) 2 R 8 .
  • NIDDM non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus
  • One preferred embodiment comprises compounds having formula I in which X is O.
  • Compounds in which X is S make up a second embodiment.
  • Another group comprises compounds having formula I in which Z is —CO 2 H.
  • a group of preferred compounds having formula I comprises compounds in which R 3 is selected from C 2 –C 6 alkyl, —C(O)C 2 –C 6 alkyl, —C(O)Aryl, —C(O)C 3 –C 12 Alicyclic, and —OC 1-6 alkyl, where alkyl in all occurrences is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from (a) 1–5 Cl and/or F atoms, and/or (b) one Aryl, where Aryl in all occurences is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from Cl, F, Br, and linear or branched C 1 –C 5 alkyl optionally substituted with 1–5 halogens.
  • a sub-group of compounds from this group comprises compounds in which R 3 is selected from C 2 –C 6 alkyl, —C(O)C 2 –C 6 alkyl, —C(O)C 3 –C 12 Alicyclic, and —OC 1-6 alkyl, where alkyl in all occurrences is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from (a) 1–5 Cl and/or F atoms, and/or (b) one Aryl, where Aryl in all occurences is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from Cl, F, Br, and linear or branched C 1 –C 5 alkyl optionally substituted with 1–5 halogens.
  • a subset of compounds having formula I includes compounds in which R 3 and R 4 are as previously defined and are not joined together to yield a 5- or 6-membered ring fused to the phenoxy or thiophenoxy ring.
  • An alternative subset comprises compounds of this invention having formula 1a:
  • A-B and B—C are each connected by a bond.
  • the bond between A-B or B—C can be a double bond, thereby yielding a five-membered ring fused to the benzene ring to which A and C are bonded, where A, B, and C are each independently selected from N, NR 9 , C, CR 9 , CR 9 2 , C ⁇ O, O, S, S(O), and S(O) 2 , where at least one of A, B, and C comprises a heteroatom selected from N, S and O that is in the ring (additional heteroatoms may also be attached to the ring; such as O in the form of a carbonyl or S oxide or S dioxide.
  • Each R 9 is independently selected from R 8 and H;
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , Ar 1 , X and Z are as defined in claim 1 .
  • R 6 is very often H in preferred compounds having Formula I or Ia.
  • Ar 1 is phenyl or pyridyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 groups independently selected from R 7 .
  • the preferred choice for Ar 1 is phenyl.
  • R 1 is selected from Cl, F, and C 2 –C 4 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F.
  • the R 1 groups are C 2-4 alkyl. Linear C 2-4 alkyl are preferred. Linear n-C 3 –C 4 are very preferred.
  • R 2 is C 2 –C 4 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F. In many preferred compounds, R 2 is linear or branched C 2 –C 4 alkyl. Linear or branched C 3 –C 4 alkyl is very preferred for R 2 , and n-C 3 –C 4 alkyl is highly preferred.
  • R 3 is —C(O)C 2 –C 6 alkyl or C 3 –C 6 alkyl, where each alkyl group may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–5-halogen. In many preferred compounds, R 3 may be linear or branched —C(O)C 2 –C 6 alkyl, and in many compounds is linear or branched —C(O)C 2 –C 4 alkyl.
  • R 4 is selected from H, —OH, —OC 1 –C 6 -alkyl, Cl and F, where —OC 1 –C 6 alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 F. In other preferred embodiments, R4 is H, Cl, F or —OH.
  • R 3 and R 4 are joined together to form a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 1–3 heteroatoms selected from S, N, and O in the ring that is fused to the benzene ring to which R 3 and R 4 are attached.
  • the benzene ring and 5- or 6-membered ring together form a fused ring system which is selected from benzisoxazole, benzisothiazole, benzthiazole, benzoxazole, quinoline, isoquinoline, chromene, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzimidazole, indole, benzoxazolone, benzisoxazolone; and benzimidazolone.
  • the 5- or 6-membered ring containing a heteroatom is eptionally substituted with 1–2 substituents independently selected from R 8 .
  • R 3 and R 4 are joined together to form a 5-membered ring fused to the benzene ring, yielding a heteroaromatic ring system.
  • Ths heteroaromatic ring system is preferably selected from benzisoxazole, benzisothiazole, benzthiazole, benzoxazole, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzimidazole, indole, benzoxazolone, benzisoxazolone, and benzimidazolone.
  • R 5 is preferably H.
  • R 6 is often H, halogen, CH 3 , or CF 3 .
  • R 6 is preferably H.
  • R 7 is C 1 –C 6 alkyl, —OAryl, C 3 –C 12 Alicyclic, —OC 1 –C 6 alkyl, —SC 1 –C 6 alkyl or —C(O)C 1 –C 3 alkyl, where alkyl in each occurrence is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens and/or one substituent selected from Aryl and Heteroaryl, and each Aryl and Heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH 3 , CF 3 , —OCH 3 and —OCF 3 .
  • each R 7 is independently selected from F, Cl, C 1 –C 4 alkyl, —OC 1 –C 4 alkyl, —SC 1 –C 4 alkyl, and —Ophenyl, wherein in each instance, alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–5 F, and —Ophenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH 3 , CF 3 , —OCH 3 and —OCF 3 .
  • Each R 8 is independently selected from halogen, C 1 –C 3 alkyl, and phenyl, wherein C 1 –C 3 alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens, and phenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH 3 , CF 3 , —OCH 3 and —OCF 3 .
  • a preferred embodiment comprises compounds having formula I in which R 3 and R 4 are not joined together to yield a 5-membered ring, and the substituent groups are as follows:
  • R 1 is Cl, F or linear or branched C 2 –C 4 alkyl
  • R 2 is linear or branched C 2 –C 4 alkyl
  • R 3 is linear or branched —C(O)C 2 –C 4 alkyl
  • R 4 is H, Cl, F, or —OH
  • R 5 and R 6 are H;
  • Each R 7 is independently selected from F, Cl, C 1 –C 4 alkyl, —OC 1 –C 4 alkyl, —SC 1 –C 4 alkyl, and —Ophenyl, wherein in each instance, alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–5 F, and —Ophenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH 3 , CF 3 , —OCH 3 and —OCF 3 .
  • R 1 and R 2 are n-C 3 –C 4 alkyl; R 4 is selected from H, —OH, and F; and R 3 is linear —C(O)C 2 –C 4 alkyl.
  • Ar 1 is phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 R 7 .
  • a preferred group of compounds includes compounds in which R 1 and R 2 are n-propyl, R 3 is —C( ⁇ O)C 2 H 5 , and R 4 is H.
  • a subset of compounds having formula Ia as defined above includes compounds having the group -A-B—C—, in which the bonds between A and B and between B and C are optionally single or double bonds, where -A-B—C— is selected from the group consisting of:
  • Preferred compounds having Formula Ia as defined above include compounds in which A is CR9, C ⁇ O, or NR9; B is N, NR9, or C ⁇ O; and C is O.
  • the group -A-B—C— is selected from —C(R 9 ) ⁇ N—O—, —C( ⁇ O)—N(R 9 )—O—, and —N(R 9 )—C( ⁇ O)—O—.
  • R 1 is selected from Cl, F, and C 2 –C 4 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F.
  • R 1 is Cl, F or linear or branched C 2 –C 4 alkyl, where C 2 –C 4 alkyl is not substituted.
  • R 1 is selected from Cl, F and n-C 3 –C 4 alkyl.
  • Ar 1 is phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 groups independently selected from R 7 .
  • R 2 is C 2 –C 4 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F.
  • R 2 is linear or branched C 2 –C 4 alkyl and is not substituted.
  • R 2 is n-C 3 –C 4 alkyl.
  • R 6 is selected from H, halogen, CH 3 , and CF 3 .
  • R 6 is H.
  • each R 7 is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1 –C 6 alkyl, —OAryl, C 3 –C 12 Alicyclic, —OC 1 –C 6 alkyl, —SC 1 –C 6 alkyl and —C(O)C 1 –C 3 alkyl, wherein alkyl in each occurrence is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens, and Aryl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH 3 , CF 3 , —OCH 3 and —OCF 3 .
  • each R 7 is independently selected from F, Cl, C 1 –C 4 alkyl, —OC 1 –C 4 alkyl, —SC 1 –C 4 alkyl, and —Ophenyl, wherein in each instance, alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–5 F, and —Ophenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH 3 , CF 3 , —OCH 3 and —OCF 3 .
  • R 8 is independently selected from halogen, C 1 –C 3 alkyl, and phenyl, wherein C 1 –C 3 alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens, and phenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH 3 , CF 3 , —OCH 3 and —OCF 3 .
  • R 8 is selected from C 1-5 alkyl, which is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 F, and phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH 3 , CF 3 , —OCH 3 and —OCF 3 .
  • each R 9 is independently selected from R 8 and H.
  • Ar 1 is generally phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 groups independently selected from R 7 .
  • the group -A-B—C— is selected from —C(R 9 ) ⁇ N—O—, —C( ⁇ O)—N(R 9 )—O—, and —N(R 9 )—C( ⁇ O)—O—;
  • R 1 is selected from Cl, F and linear or branched C 2 –C 4 alkyl
  • R 2 is linear or branched C 2 –C 4 alkyl
  • Each R 7 is independently selected from F, Cl, C 1 –C 4 alkyl, —OC 1 –C 4 alkyl, —SC 1 –C 4 alkyl, and —Ophenyl, wherein in each instance, alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–5 F, and —Ophenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH 3 , CF 3 , —OCH 3 and —OCF 3 ; and
  • R 8 is selected from C 1-5 alkyl, which is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F, and phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH 3 , CF 3 , —OCH 3 and —OCF 3 .
  • a preferred subgroup of the compounds described above includes compounds having formula Ia in which
  • R 1 is selected from Cl, F and n-C 3 –C 4 alkyl
  • R 2 is n-C 3 –C 4 alkyl
  • Ar 1 is phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 groups independently selected from R 7 .
  • the invention further includes pharmaceutical compositions comprising any of the compounds described herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the compounds as defined above are useful in treating, controlling, and preventing the following diseases, and may also be used in treating other diseases that are not listed below:
  • a method for treating, controlling or preventing diabetes mellitus, and particularly non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus, in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I;
  • a method for treating, controlling, or preventing hypercholesterolemia in a mammalian patient-in need of such treatment which comprises administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I;
  • a method for treating, controlling, or preventing dyslipidemia, including low HDL cholesterol, in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I;
  • a method for treating, controlling, or preventing atherosclerosis in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I; it is understood that the sequellae of atherosclerosis (angina, claudication, heart attack, stroke, etc.) are thereby treated; and
  • Alkyl as well as other groups having the prefix “alk”, such as alkoxy or alkanoyl, means carbon chains which may be linear or branched or combinations thereof, unless the carbon chain is defined otherwise.
  • alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec- and tert-butyl, pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, and the like.
  • Alkynyl means carbon chains which contain at least one carbon-carbon triple bond, and which may be linear or branched or combinations thereof. Examples of alkynyl include ethynyl, propargyl, 3-methyl-1-pentynyl, 2-heptynyl and the like.
  • Cycloalkyl means a saturated or partly saturated monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclic ring system each having from 3 to 12 carbon atoms, unless otherwise defined. The term also can include a monocyclic ring fused to an aryl group or other ring system. Examples of cycloalkyl include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, and the like.
  • S may also have 1–2 O atoms bound to it that are not in. the ring itself.
  • aryl include phenyl and naphthyl, as well as the phenyl ring of indanyl, indenyl, and tetrahydronaphthyl.
  • aryl fused to heterocyclic groups include 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, dihydrobenzopyranyl, and the like.
  • heterocycles include tetrahydrofuran, piperazine, tetrahydropyran, and morpholine.
  • heteroaryl examples include pyrrolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridyl, oxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thiazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, furanyl, triazinyl, thienyl, pyrimidyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl (including S-oxide and dioxide), furo(2,3-b)pyridyl, quinolyl, indolyl, isoquinolyl and the like.
  • Preferred monocyclic heteroaryls are comprised of 5–6 membered rings having 1–3 heteroatoms in the ring, where the heteroatoms are selected from N, O and S. There may also be additional heteroatoms that are not part of the ring structure but are attached to the ring, such as carbonyl oxygens and O atoms attached to S atoms in the ring. Examples include furan, pyrrole, thiophene (including S-oxide and dioxide), oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, and pyridine. In a preferred subset of monocyclic heteroaryls, no more than one ring heteroatom is N.
  • Preferred bicyclic hetereoaryls comprise two fused rings having 9–10 atoms in the two rings, including 1–4 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S. There may also be additional heteroatoms that are not part of the ring structure but are attached to the ring, such as carbonyl oxygens and O atoms attached to S atoms in the ring. Examples include indole, benzofuran, benzothiophene (including S-oxide and dioxide), benzisoxazole, benzisothiazole, benzoxazole, benzisothiazole, benzopyran, furo(2,3-b)pyridine, quinoline, and isoquinoline. In a preferred subset of bicyclic heteroaryls, no more than one ring heteroatom is N.
  • Halogen includes fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine. Preferred halogens are chlorine and fluorine.
  • composition as in pharmaceutical composition, is intended to encompass a product comprising the active ingredient(s), and the inert ingredient(s) that make up the carrier, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combination, complexation or aggregation of any two or more of the ingredients, or from dissociation of one or more of the ingredients, or from other types of reactions or interactions of one or more of the ingredients.
  • pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention encompass any composition made by admixing a compound of the present invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • Compounds of Formula I, Ia and Ib (written collectively in this section as I) contain at least one asymmetric center and may contain more than one asymmetric center.
  • the compounds can thus occur as racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, diastereomeric mixtures and individual diastereomers.
  • the present invention is meant to comprehend all such isomeric forms of the compounds of Formula I.
  • tautomers Some of the compounds described herein may exist with different points of attachment of hydrogen accompanied by one or more double bond shifts, referred to as tautomers.
  • a ketone and its enol form are keto-enol tautomers.
  • the individual tautomers as well as mixtures thereof are encompassed with compounds of Formula I.
  • racemic mixtures of compounds of Formula I may be separated by the coupling of a racemic mixture of the compounds of Formula I to an enantiomerically pure compound to form a diastereomeric mixture, followed by separation of the individual diastereomers by standard methods, such as fractional crystallization or chromatography.
  • the coupling reaction is often the formation of salts using an enantiomerically pure acid or base.
  • the diasteromeric derivatives may then be converted to the pure enantiomers by cleavage of the added chiral residue.
  • the racemic mixture of the compounds of Formula I can also be separated directly by chromatographic methods utilizing chiral stationary phases, which methods are well known in the art.
  • Salts derived from pharmaceutically acceptable organic non-toxic bases include salts of primary, secondary, and tertiary amines, substituted amines including naturally occurring substituted amines, cyclic amines, and basic ion exchange resins, such as arginine, betaine, caffeine, choline, N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine, diethylamine, 2-diethylaminoethanol, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, N-ethylmorpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, glucamine, glucosamine, histidine, hydrabamine, isopropylamine, lysine, methylglucamine, morpholine, piperazine, piperidine, polyamine resins, procaine, purines, theobromine, triethylamine, trimethylamine, tripropylamine, tromethamine, and the like.
  • basic ion exchange resins such as
  • salts may be prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic acids, including inorganic and organic acids.
  • acids include acetic, benzenesulfonic, benzoic, camphorsulfonic, citric, ethanesulfonic, fumaric, gluconic, glutamic, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, isethionic, lactic, maleic, malic, mandelic, methanesulfonic, mucic, nitric, pamoic, pantothenic, phosphoric, succinic, sulfuric, tartaric, p-toluenesulfonic acid, and the like.
  • Particularly preferred are citric, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, maleic, phosphoric, sulfuric, and tartaric acids.
  • a non-limiting example of a prodrug of the carboxylic acids of this invention would be an ester of the carboxylic acid group, for example a C 1 to C 6 ester, which may be linear or branched, or more typically, an ester which has functionality that makes it more easily hydrolyzed or metabolized after administration to a patient.
  • an ester of the carboxylic acid group for example a C 1 to C 6 ester, which may be linear or branched, or more typically, an ester which has functionality that makes it more easily hydrolyzed or metabolized after administration to a patient.
  • Examples of prodrugs of Formula Ib include compounds in which R 10 is selected from the group consisting of —OR 11 , —OCH 2 OR 11 , —OCH(CH 3 )OR 11 , —OCH 2 OC(O)R 11 , —OCH(CH 3 )OC(O)R 11 , —OCH 2 OC(O)OR 11 , —OCH(CH 3 )OC(O)OR 11 , and —NR 12 R 12 , where each R 11 is independently selected from C 1-6 alkyl optionally substituted with one or two groups selected from —CO 2 H, —CONH 2 , —NH 2 , —OH, —OAc, —NHAc, and phenyl; and wherein each R 12 is independently selected from H and R 11 .
  • Compounds of the present invention are potent agonists of varioius peroxisome proliferator activator receptor subtypes, particularly PPAR ⁇ and/or PPAR ⁇ .
  • Compounds of the present invention may be selective agonists of one receptor subtype, e.g. PPAR ⁇ or PPAR ⁇ agonists, or they may be agonists of more than one receptor subtypes, e.g. dual PPAR ⁇ / ⁇ agonists.
  • Compounds of the present invention are useful in treating, controlling or preventing diseases, disorders or conditions, wherein the treatment is mediated by the activation of an individual PPAR subtype ( ⁇ or ⁇ ), or a combination of PPAR subtypes (e.g. ⁇ / ⁇ ).
  • one aspect of the present invention provides a method for the treatment, control or prevention of such diseases, disorders, or conditions in a mammal which comprises administering to such mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I.
  • the diseases, disorders or conditions for which compounds of the present invention are useful in treating, controlling or preventing include, but are not limited to, (1) diabetes mellitus, and especially non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM), (2) hyperglycemia, (3) impaired glucose tolerance, (4) insulin resistance, (5) obesity, (6) lipid disorders, (7) dyslipidemia, (8) hyperlipidemia, (9) hypertriglyceridemia, (10) hypercholesterolemia, (11) low HDL levels, (12) high LDL levels, (13) atherosclerosis and its sequelae, (14) vascular restenosis, (15) irritable bowel syndrome, (16) inflammatory bowel disease, including Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis, (17) other inflammatory conditions, (18) pancreatitis, (19) abdominal obesity, (20) neurode
  • Another aspect of the invention provides a method for the treatment, control, or prevention of hypercholesterolemia, atherosclerosis, low HDL levels, high LDL levels, hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, and/or dyslipidemia, which comprises administering to a mammal in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of an agonist of PPAR ⁇ and/or PPAR ⁇ or a PPAR ⁇ / ⁇ dual agonist.
  • the PPAR agonist may be used alone or advantageously may be administered with a cholesterol biosynthesis inhibitor, including but not limited to, an HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor such as lovastatin, simvastatin, pravastatin, fluvastatin, atorvastatin, rivastatin, itavastatin, or ZD-4522.
  • a cholesterol biosynthesis inhibitor including but not limited to, an HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor such as lovastatin, simvastatin, pravastatin, fluvastatin, atorvastatin, rivastatin, itavastatin, or ZD-4522.
  • the PPAR agonist may also be used advantageously in combination with other lipid lowering drugs such as cholesterol absorption inhibitors (for example stanol esters, sterol glycosides such as tiqueside, and azetidinones such as ezetimibe), ACAT inhibitors (such as avasimibe), and with niacin, bile acid sequestrants, microsomal triglyceride transport inhibitors, and bile acid reuptake inhibitors.
  • cholesterol absorption inhibitors for example stanol esters, sterol glycosides such as tiqueside, and azetidinones such as ezetimibe
  • ACAT inhibitors such as avasimibe
  • niacin niacin
  • bile acid sequestrants bile acid sequestrants
  • microsomal triglyceride transport inhibitors microsomal triglyceride transport inhibitors
  • bile acid reuptake inhibitors bile acid reup
  • Another aspect of the invention provides a method of treating cachexia.
  • PPAR ⁇ is known to be necessary for an appropriate energy sparing response to starvation, and inappropriate metabolism and energy utilization is clearly responsible for the wasting of cachexia.
  • Another aspect of the invention provides a method of treating a variety of skin diseases and dermatological conditions that are modulated by PPAR ⁇ and/or ⁇ agonists. These diseases and conditions include psoriasis and acne vulgaris. Examples of other skin diseases and dermatological disorders that may be treated include eczema; lupus associated skin lesions; dermatitides such as seborrheic dermatitis and solar dermatitis; keratoses such as seborrheic keratosis, senile keratosis, actinic keratosis, photo-induced keratosis, and keratosis follicularis; keloids and prophylaxis against keloid formation, warts inluding verruca, condyloma, or condyloma accuminatum, and human papilloma viral (HPV) infections such as venereal warts, viral warts, molluscum conta
  • the effective dosage of active ingredient employed may vary depending on the particular compound employed, the mode of administration, the condition being treated and the severity of the condition being treated. Such dosage may be ascertained readily by a person skilled in the art.
  • the compounds of the present invention are administered at a daily dosage of from about 0.1 milligram to about 100 milligram per kilogram of animal body weight, preferably given as a single daily dose or in divided doses two to six times a day, or in sustained release form.
  • the total daily dosage is from about 1.0 milligrams to about 1000 milligrams, preferably from about 1 milligrams to about 50 milligrams. In the case of a 70 kg adult human, the total daily dose will generally be from about 7 milligrams to about 350 milligrams. This dosage regimen may be adjusted to provide the optimal therapeutic response.
  • compositions which comprise a compound of Formula I and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention comprise a compound of Formula I or Ia or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof as an active ingredient, as well as a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and optionally other therapeutic ingredients.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts refers to salts prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic bases or acids including inorganic bases or acids and organic bases or acids.
  • the compounds of Formula I can be combined as the active ingredient in intimate admixture with a pharmaceutical carrier according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques.
  • the carrier may take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration, e.g., oral or parenteral (including intravenous).
  • any of the usual pharmaceutical media may be employed, such as, for example, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, coloring agents and the like in the case of oral liquid preparations, such as, for example, suspensions, elixirs and solutions; or carriers such as starches, sugars, microcrystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents and the like in the case of oral solid preparations such as, for example, powders, hard and soft capsules and tablets, with the solid oral preparations being preferred over the liquid preparations.
  • oral liquid preparations such as, for example, suspensions, elixirs and solutions
  • carriers such as starches, sugars, microcrystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents and the like in the case of oral solid preparations such as, for example, powders, hard and soft capsules and tablets, with the solid oral preparations being preferred over the liquid preparation
  • tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit form in which case solid pharmaceutical carriers are obviously employed. If desired, tablets may be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques. Such compositions and preparations should contain at least 0.1 percent of active compound. The percentage of active compound in these compositions may, of course, be varied and may conveniently be between about 2 percent to about 60 percent of the weight of the unit. The amount of active compound in such therapeutically useful compositions is such that an effective dosage will be obtained.
  • the active compounds can also be administered intranasally as, for example, liquid drops or spray.
  • the tablets, pills, capsules, and the like may also contain a binder such as gum tragacanth, acacia, corn starch or gelatin; excipients such as dicalcium phosphate; a disintegrating agent such as corn starch, potato starch, alginic acid; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate; and a sweetening agent such as sucrose, lactose or saccharin.
  • a dosage unit form is a capsule, it may contain, in addition to materials of the above type, a liquid carrier such as a fatty oil.
  • tablets may be coated with shellac, sugar or both.
  • a syrup or elixir may contain, in addition to the active ingredient, sucrose as a sweetening agent, methyl and propylparabens as preservatives, a dye and a flavoring such as cherry or orange flavor.
  • the pharmaceutical forms suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions.
  • the form must be sterile and must be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi.
  • the carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (e.g. glycerol, propylene glycol and liquid polyethylene glycol), suitable mixtures thereof, and vegetable oils.
  • Compounds of Formula I may be used in combination with other drugs that may also be useful in the treatment, prevention, suppression or amelioration of the diseases or conditions for which compounds of Formula I are useful. Such other drugs may be administered, by a route and in an amount commonly used therefor, contemporaneously or sequentially with a compound of Formula I. When a compound of Formula I is used contemporaneously with one or more other drugs, a pharmaceutical composition in unit dosage form containing such other drugs and the compound of Formula I is preferred. However, the combination therapy also includes therapies in which the compound of Formula I and one or more other drugs are administered on different overlapping schedules.
  • compositions of the present invention include those that contain one or more other active ingredients, in addition to a compound of Formula I.
  • Examples of other active ingredients that may be administered in combination with a compound of Formula I, and either administered separately or in the same pharmaceutical composition include, but are not limited to:
  • insulin sensitizers including (i) PPAR ⁇ agonists such as the glitazones (e.g. troglitazone, pioglitazone, englitazone, MCC-555, rosiglitazone, and the like), and compounds disclosed in WO97/27857, 97/28115, 97/28137 and 97/27847; (ii) biguanides such as metformin and phenformin; (iii) protein tyrosine phosphatase-1B (PTP-1B) inhibitors, and (iv) dipeptidyl peptidase IV (DPP-IV) inhibitors;
  • PPAR ⁇ agonists such as the glitazones (e.g. troglitazone, pioglitazone, englitazone, MCC-555, rosiglitazone, and the like), and compounds disclosed in WO97/27857, 97/28115, 97/28137 and 97/27847; (
  • ⁇ -glucosidase inhibitors such as acarbose
  • cholesterol lowering agents such as (i) HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors (lovastatin, simvastatin, pravastatin, fluvastatin, atorvastatin, rivastatin, itavastatin, ZD-4522 and other statins), (ii) sequestrants (cholestyramine, colestipol, and dialkylaminoalkyl derivatives of a cross-linked dextran), (iii) nicotinyl alcohol, nicotinic acid or a salt thereof, (iv) PPAR ⁇ agonists such as fibric acid derivatives (clofibrate, fenofibrate and bezafibrate) or gemfibrozil, (v) PPAR ⁇ / ⁇ dual agonists, such as KRP-297, (vi) inhibitors of cholesterol absorption, such as for example ezetimibe, (vii) acyl CoA: cholesterol acyltransferase inhibitors, such as for example
  • antiobesity compounds such as fenfluramine, dexfenfluramine, phentermine, sibutramine, mazindol, orlistat, lipase inhibitors, neuropeptide Y5 inhibitors, and ⁇ 3 adrenergic receptor agonists;
  • agents intended for use in inflammatory conditions such as aspirin, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, glucocorticoids, azulfidine, and cyclo-oxygenase 2 selective inhibitors.
  • the above combinations include combinations of a compound of the present invention not only with one other active compound, but also with two or more other active compounds.
  • Non-limiting examples include combinations of compounds having Formula I with two or more active compounds selected from biguanides, sulfonylureas, HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors, other PPAR agonists, PTP-1B inhibitors, DPP-IV inhibitors, and anti-obesity compounds.
  • Human PPAR ⁇ 2 Human PPAR ⁇ and human PPAR ⁇ were expressed as gst-fusion proteins in E. coli .
  • the full length human cDNA for PPAR ⁇ 2 was subcloned into the pGEX-2T expression vector (Pharmacia).
  • the full length human cDNAs for PPAR ⁇ and PPAR ⁇ were subcloned into the pGEX-KT expression vector (Pharmacia). E. coli containing the respective plasmids were propagated, induced, and harvested by centrifugation.
  • the resuspended pellet was broken in a French press and debris was removed by centrifugation at 12,000 ⁇ g.
  • Recombinant human PPAR receptors were purified by affinity chromatography on glutathione sepharose. After application to the column, and one wash, receptor was eluted with glutathione. Glycerol (10%) was added to stabilize the receptor and aliquots were stored at ⁇ 80° C.
  • TEGM Tris, pH 7.2, 1 mM EDTA, 10% glycerol, 7 ⁇ L/100 mL ⁇ -mercaptoethanol, 10 mM Na molybdate, 1 mM dithiothreitol, 5 ⁇ g/mL aprotinin, 2 ⁇ g/mL leupeptin, 2 ⁇ g/mL benzamidine and 0.5 mM PMSF) containing 0.1% non-fat dry milk and 10 nM [ 3 H 2 ] AD5075, (21 Ci/mmole), ⁇ test compound as described in Berger et al., Novel peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor (PPAR ⁇ ) and PPAR ⁇ ligands produce distinct biological effects, J.
  • TEGM 10 mM Tris, pH 7.2, 1 mM EDTA, 10% glycerol, 7 ⁇ L/100 mL ⁇ -mercaptoethanol, 10 mM Na molybdate, 1 mM di
  • TEGM Tris, pH 7.2, 1 mM EDTA, 10% glycerol, 7 ⁇ L/100 mL ⁇ -mercaptoethanol, 10 mM Na molybdate, 1 mM dithiothreitol, 5 ⁇ g/mL aprotinin, 2 ⁇ g/mL leupeptin, 2 ⁇ g/mL benzamide and 0.5 mM PMSF) containing 0.1% non-fat dry milk and 2.5 nM [ 3 H 2 ]3-chloro-4-(3-(7-propyl-3-trifluoromethyl-6-benz-[4,5]-isoxazoloxy)propylthio)phenylacetic acid (17 Ci/mmole), ⁇ test compound as described in Berger et al., Novel peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor (PPAR ⁇ ) and PPAR ⁇ ligands produce distinct biological effects,
  • TEGM Tris, pH 7.2, 1 mM EDTA, 10% glycerol, 7 ⁇ L/100 mL ⁇ -mercaptoethanol, 10 mM Na molybdate, 1 mM dithiothreitol, 5 ⁇ g/mL aprotinin, 2 ⁇ g/mL leupeptin, 2 ⁇ g/mL benzamide and 0.5 mM PMSF) containing 0.1% non-fat dry milk and 5.0 nM [3H 2 ](3-(4-(3-phenyl-7-propyl-6-benz-[4,5]-isoxazoloxy)butyloxy))phenylacetic acid (34 Ci/mmole), ⁇ test compound.
  • TEGM 10 mM Tris, pH 7.2, 1 mM EDTA, 10% glycerol, 7 ⁇ L/100 mL ⁇ -mercaptoethanol, 10 mM Na molybdate, 1 mM dithiothre
  • the chimeric receptor expression constructs pcDNA3-hPPAR ⁇ /GAL4, pcDNA3-hPPAR ⁇ /GAL4, pcDNA3-hPPAR ⁇ /GAL4 were prepared by inserting the yeast GALA transcription factor DBD adjacent to the ligand binding domains (LBDs) of hPPAR ⁇ , hPPAR ⁇ , hPPAR ⁇ , respectively.
  • the reporter construct, pUAS(5 ⁇ )-tk-luc was generated by inserting 5 copies of the GAL4 response element upstream of the herpes virus minimal thymidine kinase promoter and the luciferase reporter gene.
  • pCMV-lacZ contains the galactosidase Z gene under the regulation of the cytomegalovirus promoter.
  • COS-1 cells were seeded at 12 ⁇ 10 3 cells/well in 96 well cell culture plates in high glucose Dulbecco's modified Eagle medium (DMEM) containing 10% charcoal stripped fetal calf serum (Gemini Bio-Products, Calabasas, Calif.), nonessential amino acids, 100 units/ml Penicillin G and 100 mg/ml Streptomycin sulfate at 37° C. in a humidified atmosphere of 10% CO 2 . After 24 h, transfections were performed with Lipofectamine (GIBCO BRL, Gaithersburg, Md.) according to the instructions of the manufacturer.
  • transfection mixes for each well contained 0.48 ⁇ l of Lipofectamine, 0.00075 ⁇ g of pcDNA3-PPAR/GAL4 expression vector, 0.045 ⁇ g of pUAS(5 ⁇ )-tk-luc reporter vector and 0.0002 ⁇ g of pCMV-lacZ as an internal control for transactivation efficiency.
  • Cells were incubated in the transfection mixture for 5 h at 37° C. in an atmosphere of 10% CO 2 .
  • the cells were then incubated for ⁇ 48 h in fresh high glucose DMEM containing 5% charcoal stripped fetal calf serum, nonessential amino acids, 100 units/ml Penicillin G and 100 mg/ml Streptomycin sulfate ⁇ increasing concentrations of test compound. Since the compounds were solubilized in DMSO, control cells were incubated with equivalent concentrations of DMSO; final DMSO concentrations were ⁇ 0.1%, a concentration which was shown not to effect transactivation activity. Cell lysates were produced using Reporter Lysis Buffer (Promega, Madison, Wis.) according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Luciferase activity in cell extracts was determined using Luciferase Assay Buffer (Promega, Madison, Wis.) in an ML3000 luminometer (Dynatech Laboratories, Chantilly, Va.).
  • ⁇ -galactosidase activity was determined using ⁇ -D-galactopyranoside (Calbiochem, San Diego, Calif.).
  • mice Male db/db mice (10–11 week old C57B1/KFJ, Jackson Labs, Bar Harbor, Me.) were housed 5/cage and allowed ad lib. access to ground Purina rodent chow and water. The animals, and their food, were weighed every 2 days and were dosed daily by gavage with vehicle (0.5% carboxymethylcellulose) ⁇ test compound at the indicated dose. Drug suspensions were prepared daily. Plasma glucose, and triglyceride concentrations were determined from blood obtained by tail bleeds at 3–5 day intervals during the study period.
  • Glucose, and triglyceride, determinations were performed on a Boehringer Mannheim Hitachi 911 automatic analyzer (Boehringer Mannheim, Indianapolis, Ind.) using heparinized plasma diluted 1:6 (v/v) with normal saline. Lean animals were age-matched heterozygous mice maintained in the same manner.
  • Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Example 4 Example 5 Example 6 Example 7 Example 8 Example 9 Example 10 Example 11 Example 12 Example 13 Example 14 Example 15 Example 16 Example 17 Example 18 Example 19 Example 20 Example 21 Example 22 Example 23 Example 24 Example 25 Example 26 Example 27 Example 28 Example 29 Example 30 Example 31 Example 32 Example 33
  • One particularly versatile preparative route to racemic 2-(aryloxy)-2-arylacetic acids is the coupling of a phenol and an electrophilic arylacetic acid derivative.
  • Electrophilic phenylacetic acid derivatives are readily available from either the parent arylacetic acids by deprotonation and quenching with a halogen source such as N-bromosuccinimde or by bromination of the corresponding 2-aryl(2-hydroxy)acetic acid.
  • a halogen source such as N-bromosuccinimde
  • bromination of the corresponding 2-aryl(2-hydroxy)acetic acid is easily prepared from the Friedel Crafts acylation of an aryl residue with ethyl oxalyl chloride followed by ketone reduction.
  • Subsequent halogenation yields the necessary 2-bromo phenylacetic acid as in the illustrated example derived from cumene.
  • an electrophilic partner incorporating a lactamide chiral auxiliary is used.
  • Two procedures for the facile preparation of the desired electrophile are either by coupling of the appropriate (R) or (S) pyrrolidine lactamide with a racemic 2-haloarylacetic acid or by a route similar to the Friedel Crafts acylation reported above. The detailed chemistry of this diastereoselective condensation is described in Paul F. Devine, et alii Tet Let 37(16), 2683–2686, 1996. Preparation of typical mandelate lactamide esters are also described there.
  • the phenol partners for the desired compounds are generally avilable through standard transformations of commercially available phenols or resorcinols. Typical examples are shown below for ketoresorcinol, ketophenol and benzisoxazole classes.
  • the 2-(aryloxy)-2-arylacetic acids are prepared from the above partners by coupling in the presence of base.
  • the partners are coupled using a base in a polar solvent such as Cs 2 CO 3 in DMF or K 2 CO 3 in acetone. Couplings in acetone may require heating.
  • phenolic partners are deprotonated with a lithium alkoxide base in aprotic solvent and added to the bromide partner in ThF at low temperature, typically ⁇ 30° to ⁇ 40° C. Most couplings are then allowed to proceed to completion at ⁇ 20° C. to 0° C. Isolation of the products uses standard methods.
  • Racemic examples are cleaved in basic alcohol or basic aqueous mixed solvents by standard means. Due to a proclivity towards base induced racemization, the lactamide auxiliaries are cleaved by standard methods using LiOOH.
  • the enantiomeric excess of the final product is typically determined using any of several commercially available chiral stationary phase HPLC columns.
  • alpha-diazo intermediates are readily prepared by known methods from either arylacetic acids (Villalgordo, J. M.; Enderli, A.; Linden, A.; Heimgartner, H.; Helv Chim Acta 1995, 78 (8), 1983–1998) or alpha-keto acids (Shi, G.; Cai, W.; J Chem Soc, Perkin Trans 1 1996, (19), 2337–2338).
  • tetrazole analogs of the 2-(aryloxy)-2-arylacetic acids are accessible by any of several standard conversions of the final acids or appropriately protected intermediates to nitrites and then to tetrazoles.
  • the following example is typical of conditions used.
  • acyl sulfonamides were prepared from the carboxylic acids by standard procedures. For the example given, an activated carboxylate was coupled with a sulfonamide in the presence of base to give the desired acid surrogate.
  • the allyl ether (0.5 mol) was dissoved in ortho-dichlorobenzene (500 ml) and the reaction vessel purged with nitrogen. The mixture was heated under reflux 24 Hrs followed by cooling to RT. The reaction mixture was diluted with hexanes (1L) and extracted twice with 2 N NaOH (500 ml). The aqueous phase was washed twice with ether and washes discarded. The aqueous phase was acidified with 2N HCl and extracted three times with ether. Combined ether extracts from the acidified aqueous phase were washed with brine and dried over MgSO 4 . Extracts were reduced in vac.
  • Methyl 2-bromo-2-phenylacetate (9.16 gm 1.05 eq), Cs 2 CO 3 (10.03 grams, 1.05 eq) and the indicated benzisoxazole (10.93 grams, 1.0 eq) were combined in 100 ml DMF at room temperature. The mixture was stirred 19 Hrs. The suspension was poured into 1 L 1 N HCl and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was separated and washed with water followed by brine. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give an oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using ethyl acetate and hexanes (4:96) to give the titled compound.
  • Step 5 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid.
  • Step 3 Preparation of ⁇ -([-[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetic acid.
  • N-bromosuccinimide (0.938 g, 1.05 eq) was added to the reaction mixture. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir and warm to room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with H 2 O. The organic layer was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give a yellow oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using hexanes:ethyl acetate (95:5) to give methyl 2-bromo-2-(4-trifluoromethylthiophenyl)acetate.
  • the title ester was prepared as was described for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (85 mg) and the indicated phenol (74 mg).
  • the product was purified by silica gel chromatography (toluene) to yield the desired ester.
  • Step 3 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-[(trifluoromethyl)thio]benzeneacetic acid.
  • Step 1 Preparation of Methyl ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetate.
  • the title ester was prepared as was described for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (54 mg) and the indicated phenol (57 mg).
  • the product was purified by silica gel chromatography (hexanes:ethyl acetate 95:5) to yield the desired ester.
  • Step 2 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid.
  • the title ester was prepared as for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (82.3 mg, 0.2 mmol) and the indicated phenol (82.8 g, 0.29 mmol).
  • the product was purified by silica gel chromatography (toluene) to yield the desired ester.
  • the title acid was prepared as for example 1, step 5 from the indicated ester (100 mg, 1.0 eq) and NaOH (0.08 mL, 5 M, 2.0 eq).
  • Step 2 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid (R)Pyrrolidinelactamide ester.
  • the phenol (377 mg, 1.2 eq) was dissolved in THF (1.5 ml). Lithium tert-butoxide in THF (1 M solution, 1.2 ml, 1.0 eq) was added.
  • the bromide (372 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in THF (6 ml) and cooled to ⁇ 30 C. The solution of the lithium phenoxide was added dropwise to the solution of the bromide. The mixture was left at ⁇ 20 C. 19 Hrs followed by slow warming to 0 C. over 3 Hrs. The mixture was quenched with 1 N HCl and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was separated and washed with water followed by brine.
  • Step 2 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid.
  • the ester (466 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in methanol (15 ml).
  • Aqueous lithum hydroxide (1.0 M, 1.71 ml, 2.0 eq) was diluted into aqueous hydrogen peroxide (30% nominal, 5 ml).
  • the solution of LiOOH was added to the methanol solution of the ester at RT. After 1 Hr the mixture was quenched with 2 N HCl and extracted with ethyl acetate.
  • the organic phase was separated and washed with water followed dilute aqueous sodium bisulfite and brine.
  • the organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give a oil.
  • the resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel with hexanes:ethyl acetate plus 2% acetic acid as eluent (95:5) to give the titled compound.
  • the enantiomeric excess of the final product was determined by HPLC using a ChiralCel OD-R analytical column with acetonitrile water 0.1% TFA as eluent.
  • Diisobutylamine (0.8 ml, 0.10 eq) and 6-hydroxy-7-propyl-3-trifluoromethylbenzisoxazole (11 gm, 1.0 eq) were dissolved in toluene (275 ml) at room temperature.
  • Slow addition of sulfuryl chloride (4.20 ml, 1.15 eq) results in a suspension which was stirred overnight.
  • Additional diisobutylamine (total 1.6 ml, 0.4 eq) was added in four equal portions over 24 hr until no further starting benzisoxazole was detected by analytical TLC.
  • the reaction mixture was poured into saturated sodium bisulfite (500 ml) and ethyl ether (700 ml).
  • Step 4 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5-chloro-7-propyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetic acid (R)Pyrrolidinelactamide ester.
  • Step 5 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5-chloro-7-propyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]chlorobenzeneacetic acid.
  • the ester (1.1142 g, 1.0 eq) was hydrolyzed as was described for the ester of Example 6, Step 2.
  • the resulting oil was chromatographed on a silica gel column, eluting with glacial acetic acid:ethyl acetate:hexane (3:8:89) to give the title compound as a white solid.
  • the enantiomeric excess of this product was determined by HPLC using a ChiralCel OD-R analytical column with acetonitrile:water (55:45) containing 0.1% TFA as eluent.
  • the title compound was prepared as was described for example 6, step 2.
  • the phenol (1.46 g mg, 1.2 eq) was dissolved in THF (5.0 ml).
  • Lithium tert-butoxide in THF (1 M solution, 5.57 ml, 1.0 eq) was added.
  • the bromide (1.72 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in THF (10 ml) and cooled to ⁇ 30° C.
  • the solution of the lithium phenoxide was added dropwise to the solution of the bromide.
  • the mixture was left at ⁇ 20° C. for 19 Hrs followed by slow warming to 0° C. over 3 Hrs.
  • the mixture was quenched with 1 N HCl and extracted with ethyl acetate.
  • the enantiomeric excess of the final product was determined by HPLC using a ChiralCel OD-R analytical column with 60:40 acetonitrile:water 0.1% TFA as eluent.
  • the 2,4-dihydroxy-3-propylbenzophenone (2.5 g, 1.0 Eq, 9.8 mmol) was converted to the oxime with NH 2 OH—HCl (2.7 g, 4.0 Eq, 39 mmol) and NaOAc (3.21 g, 4.0 Eq, 39 mmol) as in Example 1 Step 3.
  • the oxime was purified by elution from a silica gel column (180 g E. Merck 40–63 ⁇ ) with 97:3 Toluene:EtOAc.
  • the product oxime (1.82 g) was further treated as in Example 1 Step 3 with acetic anhydride (15 ml) and subsequent reflux in pyridine (15 ml).
  • the allyl ether (14.7 g, 50 mmol) was dissolved in 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene (50 mL). The solution was heated under reflux for 6 h. After being cooled to room temperature, the reaction mixture was loaded onto a silica gel column and eluted first with hexane and then with ethyl acetate:hexane (1:9) to give the ortho allyl rearrangement product.
  • the ortho allyl product (8.8 g, 30 mmol) was dissolved in toluene (250 mL). After addition of the catalyst Rh(PPh 3 ) 3 Cl (1.38 g, 1.5 mmol), the homogeneous solution was stirred under H 2 (1 atm) for 5 h. The solvent was evaporated and the residue was chromatographed on silica gel eluting with ethyl acetate:hexane (1:9) to give the title compound.
  • Step 6 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-phenyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid.
  • the ester (4.00 g, 9.0 mmol) was dissolved in THF (200 ml). An aqueous solution of lithium hydroxide (2 N, 25 ml) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 h and then acidified with 2 N hydrochloric acid to pH 2. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was washed with brine, dried and concentrated. The residue was chromatographed on silica gel eluting with ethyl acetate:hexane:acetic acid (1:1:0.01) to give the title compound as a white solid.
  • step 3 The phenol of example 9 step 3 (0.25 g, 0.86 mmol) was chlorinated as for example 7, step 3.
  • the product was purified by chromatography on silica gel eluting with ethyl acetate:hexane (10:90).
  • step 1 The phenol of step 1(0.25 g, 0.86 mmol) was coupled with commercially available methyl 2-bromo-2-phenylacetate (0.20 g, 0.86 mmol) as was described for example 9, step 5.
  • the product was purified by chromatography on silica gel eluting with ethyl acetate:hexane (10:90).
  • step 2 The ester of example 10, step 2 (0.34 g, 0.77 mmol) was hydrolyzed under conditions similar to those described for example 1, step 5.
  • the product was purified by preparative HPLC on a YMC-pack C8 column. CH 3 CN:H 2 O (10:90 to 100:0, 15 min gradient) containing 0.1% TFA as eluent.
  • the crude allylation product (37.2 g, 150 mmol) was dissolved in 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene (150 mL). The solution was heated under reflux for 7 h and then cooled to 25° C. The reaction mixture was loaded directly onto a silica gel column eluting first with hexane and then with hexane:ethyl acetate(1:9) to give the rearrangment product.
  • the bis-allyl product (31.5 g, 127 mmol) was dissolved in ethyl acetate (500 mL). 10% palladium on carbon (1.5 g) was added. The resulting solution was stirred under H 2 (1 atm) for 16 h and filtered through a pad of silica gel. Concentration of the filtrate gave the title compound as a liquid.
  • Methyl 2,4-dihydroxy-3,5-dipropylbenzoate (31.6 g, 127 mmol) was dissovled in methanol (500 mL). An aqueous solution of NaOH (2 N, 380 mL, 0.762 mol) was added. After being stirred under reflux for 20 h. the reaction mixture was poured into brine (500 mL), acidified with 2 N HCl to pH 2 and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was washed with brine, dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated. The residue was used without purification.
  • the crude acid (4.1 g, 12.7 mmol) was suspended in oxalyl chloride (4.83 g, 3.12 mL, 38.1 mmol). After addition of 2 drops of DMF, the reaction mixture was heated at 60° C. for 1 h. Excess reagent was distilled off under reduced pressure and the residue was azeotroped with toluene (2 ⁇ 20 mL) to afford the crude acid chloride.
  • Step 3 2,3-dihydro-6-hydroxy-2-methyl-3-oxo-5,7-dipropyl-1,2-benzisoxazole.
  • the crude product (0.23 g, 0.80 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (5.0 mL). 2 N sodium hydroxide solution (1.0 mL) was added. After being stirred for 30 min, the reaction mixture was neutralized with 2N hydrochloric acid and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue was taken up in ethyl acetate and filtered through silica gel to give the title compound as a solid.
  • Step 4 Preparation of ⁇ -[(2,3-dihydro-2-methyl-3-oxo-5,7-dipropyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl)oxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid.
  • step 3 The phenol of step 3 (0.20 g, 0.80 mmol) was coupled with the indicated bromide (0.3 g, 0.80 mmol) as was described for example 6, step 1.
  • the product was purified by chromatography on silica gel eluting with ethyl acetate:hexane (50:50).
  • the coupling product (0.42 g, 0.72 mmol) was hydrolyzed under conditions similar to those described for example 6, step 2.
  • the product was purified by preparative HPLC on a YMC-pack C8 column with CH 3 CN:H 2 O (10:90 to 100:0, 15 min gradient) containing 0.1% TFA as eluent.
  • Step 1 Preparation of 2,3-dihydro-6-hydroxy-3-(1-methylethyl)-2-oxo-5,7-dipropyl-1,3-benzoxazole.
  • N-isopropylhydroxamic acid of example 11 step 2 (1.0 g, 3.0 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (30 mL). 2 N KOH solution was added (5 mL). After being stirred at 25° C. for 30 min the reaction mixture was acidified with 2 N hydrochloric acid to pH 2 and extracted with ethyl acetate (2 ⁇ 20 mL). The organic phase was washed with brine, dried and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexane-ethyl acetate (7:3) to give the deacetylated product as a brown oil.
  • the deacetylated product (0.74 g, 2.4 mmol) was mixed with triphenylphosphine (0.94 g, 3.6 mmol) in dry THF (20 mmol). Diethyl azodicarboxylate (0.63 g, 3.6 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min before it was quenched with methanol:acetic acid (1:1, 0.1 mL). The solvent was evaporated and the residue was subjected to chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexane:ethyl acetate (7:3) to give the title compound as an oil.
  • Step 2 Preparation of ⁇ -[(2,3-dihydro-3-(1-methylethyl)-2-oxo-5,7-dipropyl-1,3-benzoxazol-6-yl)oxy]4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid.
  • step 1 The phenol of step 1 (0.28 g, 1.0 mmol) was coupled with the indicated bromide(0.38 g, 1.0 mmol) as for example 6, step 1.
  • the product was purified by chromatography on silica gel eluting with ethyl acetate:hexane (50:50).
  • the coupling product (0.50 g, 0.88 mmol) was hydrolyzed under conditions similar to those described for example 6, step 2.
  • the product was purified by preparative HPLC on a YMC-pack C8 column CH 3 CN:H 2 O (10:90 to 100:0, 15 min gradient) containing 0.1% TFA as eluent.
  • the 2,6-bis-allylresorcinol (5.0 gm, 1.0 Eq) was dissolved in trifluoromethanesulfonic acid (25 ml) with sodium propionate (2.96 gm, 1.2 Eq). The mixture was heated to 85° C. for 11 ⁇ 2 Hrs and then cooled to RT. The mixture was diluted with H 2 O and ethyl acetate. The phases were separated and the aqueous phase extracted again with EtOAc. The EtOAc extracts were washed with saturated aq NaCl, dried over MgSO 4 and reduced i. vac.
  • the product was purified by elution from a silica gel column (200 g E. Merck 40–63 ⁇ ) with hexanes:EtOAc 96:4.
  • step 1 The phenol of step 1 (12 gm, 1.0 Eq) was coupled with commercially available methyl 2-bromo-2-phenylacetate (11.5 gm, 1.05 Eq) as for example 1, step 4.
  • the product was purified by elution from a silica gel column (700 g E. Merck 40–63 ⁇ ) with hexanes:EtOAc 96:4.
  • step 2 The ester of step 2 (18.6 gm) was hydrolyzed with NaOH (98 ml) as for example 1, step 5.
  • the product was purified by elution from a silica gel column (700 g E. Merck 40–63 ⁇ ) with hexanes:EtOAc:AcOH 88:10:2. The resulting oil was crystallized from hexanes to give the titled compound.
  • Step 3 Preparation of racemic ⁇ -[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]benzeneacetic acid.
  • the title acid was prepared as for example 1, step 5 from the indicated ester (30.0 mg, 1.0 eq) and 2 N KOH (1.1 eq). After work-up, the resulting oil was purified by chromatography on a Zorbax C8 RP (21.2 ⁇ 250 mm) HPLC column eluting with 70:30 water:acetonitrile (0.1% TFA) to give the titled compound as an oil.
  • the reaction mixture was diluted with H 2 O.
  • the aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate.
  • the organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give yellow oil.
  • the resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using hexanes and ethyl acetate (95:5) to give methyl 2-bromo-2-(4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl)acetate.
  • the methyl ester (0.052 moles) and 1 N LiOH (0.053 moles) was stirred at 0° C. for 1H.
  • the organic phase was separated and washed with water followed by brine.
  • the organic phase was then dried over magnesium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated i. vac. to give an oil which became crystalline i. vac.
  • the ⁇ -bromo acid was used in the following condensation without purification.
  • step 1 The acid from step 1 (0.053 moles) was treated with DCC (1.1 equiv., 1.0M in dichloromethane) and DMAP (0.05 equiv.) in dry dichloromethane at 0° C. as described in Tet Let 37, 2683–2686, 1996 and references cited therein. After work-up, the reaction mixture was purified on silica gel using ethyl acetate:hexanes:acetic acid (30:70:1) as eluent. The product is an approximately one to one mixture of diastereomers.
  • Step 2a Preparation of 2-oxo-2-(4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl)acetic (R)Pyrrolidinelactamide ester.
  • the crude keto acid (4.6. g, 22.8 mmol) was dissolved in dry methylene chloride (20 mL).
  • Oxalyl chloride (5.78 g, 4.0 mL, 45.6 mmol) was added followed by addition of 1 drop of dimethylformamide.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 30 min and heated under reflux for another 30 min. After all volatiles were distilled off, the residue was azeotroped with toluene (1 ⁇ 100 mL) under reduced presure to give the crude acid chloride.
  • the crude acid chloride (ca. 4.6 g, 21.8 mmol) was mixed with pyrrolidine (R)-lactamide (3.12 g, 21.8 mmol) in dry methylene chloride (100 mL). The resulting solution was cooled to 0° C., and triethylamine (4.4 g, 6.06 mL, 43.6 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was left stirring at 25 C for 30 min and then poured into 0.5 N hydrochloric acid (50 mL). The organic layer was separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with methylene chloride (2 ⁇ 50 mL). The combined organic phases were washed with brine, dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated. The residue was subjected to chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexane:ethyl acetate (1:1) to give pure title compound as a solid.
  • Step 3a Preparation of 2-Bromo-2-(4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl)acetate (R)Pyrrolidinelactamide ester.
  • the crude product (ca. 4.6 g, 14.5 mmol) was dissolved in dry methylene chloride (50 mL) at 25° C. Phosphorus tribromide (3.92 g, 1.37 mL, 14.5 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 30 min and then poured into brine (100 mL). The organic phase was separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with methylene chloride (2 ⁇ 50 mL). The combined organic phases were washed with brine, dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexane:ethyl acetate (1:1) to give the title compound as a 1:1 mixture of diastereoisomers.
  • Step 3 Preparation of ⁇ -[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]benzeneacetic acid (R)Pyrrolidinelactamide ester.
  • Example 14 Step 1 The bromide described immediately above (0.045 moles) and 1.05 equiv. of the phenol from Example 14 Step 1 were combined as in Example 6 Step 1. After work-up, the reaction mixture was purified by chromatography on silica gel using acetone:hexanes (20:80) as eluent to give the titled compound.
  • Step 2 Preparation of Methyl ⁇ -[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-4-(1-methylethoxy)benzeneacetate.
  • Step 3 Preparation of ⁇ -[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-4-(1-methylethoxy)benzeneacetic acid.
  • Step 2 Preparation of ⁇ -[3-fluoro-4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-4(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid.
  • Step 1 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetamide.
  • the indicated ester (0.5 g, 1 eq) was dissolved in toluene and freshly prepared 0.47 M dimethylaluminum amide (5 ml, 2 eq) was added. The reaction was then warmed to 100 C and allowed to stir for approximately 12 Hrs. The reaction was then cooled to room temperature and Na 2 SO 4 .10 H 2 O was added and stirred for an additional hour. Filtration followed by concentration of the solvent gave a yellow liquid. This was chromatographed on silica gel using hexanes:ethyl acetate (90:10) to (1:1) to give the amide.
  • Step 2 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetonitrile.
  • the indicated amide (0.24 g, 1 eq) was diluted with methylene chloride (5 ml) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.312 g, 2.5 eq) was then added. The resulting mixture was stirred for 10 hours. The reaction mixture was then pipetted onto a silica gel column and eluted using hexane and ethyl acetate (20:1). The nitrile was obtained.
  • nitrile (0.13 g, 1 eq) was dissolve in anhydrous THF (5 ml). Trimethyltin azide (0.080 g, 1.2 eq) was then added. The reaction mixture was warmed to reflux and allowed to reflux for 12 hours. The solution was then cooled to room temperature. 0.5 N HCl was then added and the reaction was poured into a separatory funnel. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was washed with ethyl acetate two more times. The combined organic fractions were dried with sodium sulfate and then concentrated.
  • Step 1 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetamide.
  • Step 2 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetonitrile.
  • nitrile was prepared as was described for example 18, step 2 from the indicated amide (0.088 g, 1.0 eq) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.115 g, 2.5 eq).
  • Step 1 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetamide.
  • Step 2 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetonitrile.
  • nitrile was prepared as for example 18, step 2 from the indicated amide (0.58 g, 1.0 eq) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.747 g, 2.5 eq).
  • Step 1 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-(trifluoromethyl)benzeneacetamide.
  • Step 2 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-(trifluoromethyl)benzeneacetonitrile.
  • nitrile was prepared as for example 18, step 2 from the indicated amide (0.2383 g, 1.0 eq) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.3 g, 2.5 eq).
  • Step 1 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]4-(2-methylpropyl)benzeneacetamide.
  • Step 2 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-(2-methylpropyl)benzeneacetonitrile.
  • nitrile was prepared as was described for example 18, step 2 from the indicated amide (0.33 g, 1.0 eq) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.412 g, 2.5 eq).
  • the title tetrazole was prepared as for example 18, step 3from the indicated nitrile (0.3 g, 1.0 eq) and Me 3 SnN 3 (0.162 g, 1.2 eq).
  • Step 1 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-ethylbenzeneacetamide.
  • Step 2 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-ethylbenzeneacetonitrile.
  • nitrile was prepared as was described for example 18, step 2 from the indicated amide (0.08 g, 1.0 eq) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.106 g, 2.5 eq).
  • Step 1 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-phenyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetamide.
  • Step 2 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-phenyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetonitrile.
  • nitrile was prepared as was described for example 18, step 2 from the indicated amide (0.06 g, 1.0 eq) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.083 g, 2.5 eq).
  • Step 1 Preparation of ⁇ -[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetamide.
  • Step 2 Preparation of ⁇ -[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetonitrile.
  • nitrile was prepared as was described for example 18, step 2 from the indicated amide (0.98 g, 1.0 eq) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.143 g, 2.5 eq).
  • Step 3 Preparation of 1-[4-[[4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl](1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-2,6-dipropylphenyl]-1-propanone.
  • Step 1 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]]-N-[(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)sulfonyl]benzeneacetamide
  • the CF 3 CH 2 SO 2 NH 2 was prepared by cooling a solution of commercially available CF 3 CH 2 SO 2 Cl (0.6 ml, 1 eq) in CH 2 Cl 2 to 0° C. NH 4 OH (0.75 ml, 14.8 N, 2 eq) was then added dropwise. The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature overnight. The reaction was diluted with water and extracted three times with CH 2 Cl 2 . The combined organic layers were dried with Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated. The sulfonamide was used without further purification.
  • PrSO 2 NH 2 was prepared as was described for example 26 from commercially available PrSO 2 Cl.
  • the title sulfonamide was prepared from the indicated acid (0.04 g, 1.0 eq), CDI (0.019 g, 1.2 eq), and DBU (0.017 g, 1.1 eq).
  • Ethyl 3-thiopheneacetate (1.0 g, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in THF (50 mL) and cooled to ⁇ 78° C. Lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide (6.46 mL, 1.1 eq) was added to the reaction and stirred for 20 minutes. Chlorotrimethylsilane (1.4 mL, 1.875 eq) was added at ⁇ 78° C. and stirred for 20 minutes. N-bromosuccinimide (1.06 g, 1.01 eq) was added to the reaction mixture. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir and warm to room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with H 2 O. The organic layer was extracted with ethyl acetate.
  • the title ester was prepared as was described for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (53 mg, 0.2 mmol) and the indicated phenol (65 mg, 0.29 mmol).
  • the product was purified by silica gel chromatography (hexanes:methyl t-butyl ether 99:1) to yield the desired ester.
  • Step 3 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-3-thiopheneacetic acid.
  • Ethyl 3-pyridylacetate (1.0 g, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in THF (50 mL) and cooled to ⁇ 78° C. Lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide (6.66 mL, 1.1 eq) was added to the reaction and stirred for 20 minutes. Chlorotrimethylsilane (1.44 mL, 1.875 eq) was added at ⁇ 78° C. and stirred for 20 minutes. N-bromosuccinimide (1.09 g, 1.01 eq) was added to the reaction mixture. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir and warm to room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with H 2 O. The organic layer was extracted with ethyl acetate.
  • the title ester was prepared as was described for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (83 mg) and the indicated phenol (98 mg).
  • the product was purified by silica gel chromatography (hexanes:ethyl acetate 4:1) to yield the desired ester.
  • Step 3 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-3-pyridineacetic acid.
  • methyl-4-hydrophenylacetate (5.00 g) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (50 mL). 2-Picolyl chloride hydrochloride (4.94 g) and cesium carbonate (24.50 g) was added. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 18 hr. The reaction mixture was diluted with H 2 O. The organic layer was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give a yellow oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using hexanes:ethyl acetate (60:40) to the title compound.
  • Step 2 Preparation of methyl ⁇ -bromo[4-(pyridin-2-ylmethoxy)phenyl]acetate.
  • the crude oil prepared above was cooled to ⁇ 78° C. in THF (100 mL). Lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide (27.91 mL, 1.1 eq) was added to the reaction and stirred for 20 minutes. Chlorotrimethylsilane (6.04 mL, 1.875 eq) was added at ⁇ 78° C. and stirred for 20 minutes. N-bromosuccinimide (4.74 g, 1.05 eq) was added to the reaction mixture. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir and warm to room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with H 2 O. The organic layer was extracted with ethyl acetate.
  • Step 3 Preparation of Methyl ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-[pyridin-2-ylmethoxy]benzeneacetate.
  • the title ester was prepared as for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (5.31 g, 15.80 mmol) and the indicated phenol (4.54 g, 15.80 mmol).
  • the product was purified by silica gel chromatography (toluene) to yield the desired ester.
  • Step 4 Preparation of racemic ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-[pyridin-2-ylmethoxy]benzeneacetic acid.
  • the ester (1.56 grams, 1.0 Eq) was dissolved in methanol (10 ml). Aqueous NaOH (2.5 M, 5.91 ml) was added. The mixture stirred at room temperature for 3 Hrs. The reaction mixture was acidified by 1 equivalent acetic acid. The mixture was washed with water. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give white solid.
  • Step 5 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-[pyridin-2-ylmethoxy]benzeneacetic acid (R)Pyrrolidinelactamide ester.
  • the acid (0.358 g) was dissolved in methylene chloride(3 mL). Pyrrolidine (R)lactamide (0.116 g) and 4-(dimethylamino)pyridine (8.3 mg) was added. The reaction was cooled to 0 C and dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (0.154 g) was added. The reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 18 hrs. The reaction mixture was filtered to remove the solids. The filtrate was concentrated. The diastereoisomers were separated by silica gel chromatography (toluene/acetonitrile 80:20) to yield the titled compound.
  • Step, 6 Preparation of ⁇ -[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-[pyridin-2-ylmethoxy]benzeneacetic acid.
  • the ester (143 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (1 ml).
  • Aqueous lithum hydroxide (1.0 M, 0.438 ml, 2.0 eq) was diluted into aqueous hydrogen peroxide (30% nominal, 0.337 ml).
  • the solution of LiOOH was added to the methanol solution of the ester at RT. After 1 Hr the mixture was quenched with 1 M acetic acid and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give a oil.
  • the resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel with hexanes:ethyl acetate plus 1% acetic acid as eluent (20:80) to give the titled compound.
  • the enantiomeric excess of the final product was determined by HPLC using a ChiralCel OD-R analytical column with acetonitrile water 0.1% TFA as eluent.
  • the title ester was prepared as was described for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (104 mg) and the indicated phenol (106 mg).
  • the product was purified by silica gel chromatography (toluene:hexanes 90:10) to yield the desired ester.
  • Step 2 Preparation of ⁇ -[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-3-pyridineacetic acid.
  • Step 2 Preparation of Methyl ⁇ -[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy)-2-(2-phenyl-1,3-thiazol-4-yl)acetate.
  • the title ester was prepared as was described for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide and phenol.
  • the resulting solid was purified by chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate and hexane (1:9) as eluent to give the titled compound.
  • Step 3 Preparation of ⁇ -[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy)-2-(2-phenyl-1,3-thiazol-4-yl)acetic acid.
  • Step 4 Preparation of ⁇ -[2,6-dipropyl-4-[2-(5-methyl-2-phenyl-1,3-oxazol-4-yl)ethoxy]phenoxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetic acid.

Abstract

A class of 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids comprises compounds that are potent agonists of PPAR alpha and/or gamma, and are therefore useful in the treatment, control or prevention of non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM), hyperglycemia, dyslipidemia, hyperlipidemia, hypercholesterolemia, hypertriglyceridemia, atherosclerosis, obesity, vascular restenosis, inflammation, and other PPAR alpha and/or gamma mediated diseases, disorders and conditions.

Description

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application is a U.S. National Phase application under 35 U.S.C. § 371 of PCT Application No. PCT/US02/04680, filed Feb. 5, 2002, and claims priority under 35 U.S.C. § 119 (e) from U.S. Application No. 60/267,809, filed Feb. 9, 2001.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The instant invention is concerned with 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs thereof which are useful as therapeutic compounds, particularly in the treatment and prevention of Type 2 diabetes mellitus, often referred to as non-insulin dependent diabetes (NIDDM), of conditions that are often associated with this disease, and of lipid disorders.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Diabetes refers to a disease process derived from multiple causative factors and characterized by elevated levels of plasma glucose or hyperglycemia in the fasting state or after administration of glucose during an oral glucose tolerance test. Persistent or uncontrolled hyperglycemia is associated with increased and premature morbidity and mortality. Often abnormal glucose homeostasis is associated both directly and indirectly with alterations of the lipid, lipoprotein and apolipoprotein metabolism and other metabolic and hemodynamic disease. Therefore patients with Type 2 diabetes mellitus are at especially increased risk of macrovascular and microvascular complications, including coronary heart disease, stroke, peripheral vascular disease, hypertension, nephropathy, neuropathy, and retinopathy. Therefore, therapeutical control of glucose homeostasis, lipid metabolism and hypertension are critically important in the clinical management and treatment of diabetes mellitus.
There are two generally recognized forms of diabetes. In type 1 diabetes, or insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (IDDM), patients produce little or no insulin, the hormone which regulates glucose utilization. In type 2 diabetes, or noninsulin dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM), patients often have plasma insulin levels that are the same or even elevated compared to nondiabetic subjects; however, these patients have developed a resistance to the insulin stimulating effect on glucose and lipid metabolism in the main insulin-sensitive tissues, which are muscle, liver and adipose tissues, and the plasma insulin levels, while elevated, are insufficient to overcome the pronounced insulin resistance.
Insulin resistance is not primarily due to a diminished number of insulin receptors but to a post-insulin receptor binding defect that is not yet understood. This resistance to insulin responsiveness results in insufficient insulin activation of glucose uptake, oxidation and storage in muscle and inadequate insulin repression of lipolysis in adipose tissue and of glucose production and secretion in the liver.
The available treatments for type 2 diabetes, which have not changed substantially in many years, have recognized limitations. While physical exercise and reductions in dietary intake of calories will dramatically improve the diabetic condition, compliance with this treatment is very poor because of well-entrenched sedentary lifestyles and excess food consumption, especially of foods containing high amounts of saturated fat. Increasing the plasma level of insulin by administration of sulfonylureas (e.g. tolbutamide and glipizide), which stimulate the pancreatic β-cells to secrete more insulin, and/or by injection of insulin after the response to sulfonylureas fails, will result in high enough insulin concentrations to stimulate the very insulin-resistant tissues. However, dangerously low levels of plasma glucose can result from these last two treatments, and increasing insulin resistance due to the even higher plasma insulin levels can occur. The biguanides increase insulin sensitivity resulting in some correction of hyperglycemia. However, the two biguanides, phenformin and metformin, can induce lactic acidosis and nausea/diarrhea, respectively.
The glitazones (i.e. 5-benzylthiazolidine-2,4-diones) are a more recently described class of compounds with potential for a novel mode of action in ameliorating many symptoms of type 2 diabetes. These agents substantially increase insulin sensitivity in muscle, liver and adipose tissue in several animal models of type 2 diabetes resulting in partial or complete correction of the elevated plasma levels of glucose without occurrence of hypoglycemia. For a review, see Willson, T. M. et al., J. Med. Chem., 43(4) 527–550, (2000).
Disorders of lipid metabolism or dyslipidemias include various conditions characterized by abnormal concentrations of one or more lipids (i.e. cholesterol and triglycerides), and/or apolipoproteins (i.e., apolipoproteins A, B, C and E), and/or lipoproteins (i.e., the macromolecular complexes formed by the lipid and the apolipoprotein that allow lipids to circulate in blood, such as Low Density Lipoproteins (LDL), Very Low Density Lipoproteins (VLDL) and Intermediate Density Lipoproteins (IDL). Cholesterol is mostly carried in Low Density Lipoproteins (LDL), and this component is commonly known as the “bad” cholesterol because it has been shown that elevations in LDL-cholesterol correlate closely to the risk of coronary heart disease. A smaller component of cholesterol is carried in the High Density Lipoproteins (HDL) and is commonly known as the “good” cholesterol. In fact, it is known that the primary function of HDL is to accept cholesterol deposited in the arterial wall and to transport it back to the liver for disposal through the intestine. Although it is desirable to lower elevated levels of LDL cholesterol, it is also desirable to increase levels of HDL cholesterol. Generally, it has been found that increased levels of HDL are associated with lower risk for coronary heart disease (CHD). See, for example, Gordon, et al., Am. J. Med., 62, 707–714 (1977); Stampfer, et al., N. England J. Med., 325, 373–381 (1991); and Kannel, et al., Ann. Internal Med., 90, 85–91(1979). An example of an HDL raising agent is nicotinic acid, a drug with limited utility because doses that achieve HDL raising are associated with undesirable effects, such as flushing.
Dyslipidemias were originally classified by Fredrickson according to the combination of alterations mentioned above. The Fredrickson classification includes 6 phenotypes (i.e., I, IIa, IIb, III, IV and V) with the most common being the isolated hypercholesterolemia (or type IIa) which is usually accompained by elevated concentrations of total and LDL cholesterol. The initial treatment for hypercholesterolemia is often to modify the diet to one low in fat and cholesterol, coupled with appropriate physical exercise, followed by drug therapy when LDL-lowering goals are not met by diet and exercise alone
A second common form of dyslipidemia is the mixed or combined hyperlipidemia or type IIb and III of the Fredrickson classification. This dyslipidemia is often prevalent in patients with type 2 diabetes, obesity and the metabolic syndrome. In this dyslipidemia there are modest elevations of LDL-cholesterol, accompanied by more pronounced elevations of small dense LDL-cholesterol particles, VLDL and/or IDL (i.e., triglyceride rich lipoproteins), and total triglycerides. In addition, concentrations of HDL are often low.
Peroxisome proliferators are a structurally diverse group of compounds that when administered to rodents elicit dramatic increases in the size and number of hepatic and renal peroxisomes, as well as concomitant increases in the capacity of peroxisomes to metabolize fatty acids via increased expression of the enzymes of the beta-oxidation cycle. Compounds of this group include but are not limited to the fibrate class of lipid modulating drugs, herbicides and phthalate plasticizers. Peroxisome proliferation is also triggered by dietary or physiological factors such as a high-fat diet and cold acclimatization.
Three sub-types of peroxisome proliferator activated receptor (PPAR) have been discovered and described; they are peroxisome proliferator activated receptor alpha (PPARα), peroxisome proliferator activated receptor gamma (PPARγ) and peroxisome proliferator activated receptor delta (PPARδ). Identification of PPARα, a member of the nuclear hormone receptor superfamily activated by peroxisome proliferators, has facilitated analysis of the mechanism by which peroxisome proliferators exert their pleiotropic effects. PPARα is activated by a number of medium and long-chain fatty acids, and it is involved in stimulating β-oxidation of fatty acids. PPARα is also associated with the activity of fibrates and fatty acids in rodents and humans. Fibric acid derivatives such as clofibrate, fenofibrate, bezafibrate, ciprofibrate, beclofibrate and etofibrate, as well as gemfibrozil, each of which are PPARα ligands and/or activators, produce a substantial reduction in plasma triglycerides as well as some increase in HDL. The effects on LDL cholesterol are inconsistent and might depend upon the compound and/or the dyslipidemic phenotype. For these reasons, this class of compounds has been primarily used to treat hypertriglyceridemia (i.e, Fredrickson Type IV and V) and/or mixed hyperlipidemia.
The PPARγ receptor subtypes are involved in activating the program of adipocyte differentiation and are not involved in stimulating peroxisome proliferation in the liver. There are two known protein isoforms of PPARγ: PPARγ1 and PPARγ2 which differ only in that PPARγ2 contains an additional 28 amino acids present at the amino terminus. The DNA sequences for the human isotypes are described in Elbrecht, et al., BBRC 224;431–437 (1996). In mice, PPARγ2 is expressed specifically in fat cells. Tontonoz et al., Cell 79: 1147–1156 (1994) provide evidence to show that one physiological role of PPARγ2 is to induce adipocyte differentiation. As with other members of the nuclear hormone receptor superfamily, PPARγ2 regulates the expression of genes through interaction with other proteins and binding to hormone response elements, for example in the 5′ flanking regions of responsive genes. An example of a PPARγ2 responsive gene is the tissue-specific adipocyte P2 gene. Although peroxisome proliferators, including the fibrates and fatty acids, activate the transcriptional activity of PPAR's, only prostaglandin J2 derivatives have been identified as potential natural ligands of the PPARγ subtype, which also binds thiazolidinedione antidiabetic agents with high affinity.
The human nuclear receptor gene PPARδ (hPPARδ) has been cloned from a human osteosarcoma cell cDNA library and is fully described in A. Schmidt et al., Molecular Endocrinology, 6 :1634–1641 (1992). It should be noted that PPARδ is also referred to in the literature as PPARβ and as NUC1, and each of these names refers to the same receptor; in Schmidt et al. the receptor is referred to as NUC1.
In WO96/01430, a human PPAR subtype, hNUC1B, is disclosed. The amino acid sequence of hNUC1B differs from human PPARδ (referred to therein as hNUC1) by one amino acid, i.e., alanine at position 292. Based on in vivo experiments described therein, the authors suggest that hNUC1B protein represses hPPARα and thyroid hormone receptor protein activity.
It has been disclosed in WO97/28149 that agonists of PPARδ are useful in raising HDL plasma levels. WO97/27857, 97/28115, 97/28137 and 97/27847 disclose compounds that are useful as antidiabetic, antiobesity, anti-atherosclerosis and antihyperlipidemic agents, and which may exert their effect through activation of PPARs.
It is generally believed that glitazones exert their effects by binding to the peroxisome proliferator activated receptor (PPAR) family of receptors, controlling certain transcription elements having to do with the biological entities listed above. See Hulin et al., Current Pharm. Design (1996) 2, 85–102.
A number of glitazones that are PPAR agonists have been approved for use in the treatment of diabetes. These include troglitazone, rosiglitazone and pioglitazone, all of which are primarily or exclusively PPARγ agonists. Many of the newer PPAR agonists that are currently under development or are in clinical trials have dual PPARα and γ activity. These are expected to improve both insulin sensitivity and the lipid profile in patients having NIDDM.
Although glitazones are beneficial in the treatment of NIDDM, there have been some serious adverse events associated with the use of the compounds. The most serious of these has been liver toxicity, which has resulted in a number of deaths. The most serious problems have occurred using troglitazone, which was recently withdrawn from the US market due to these concerns about toxicity. Because of the problems that have occurred with the glitazones, researchers in a number of laboratories have been investigating classes of PPAR agonists that are not glitazones and do not contain 1,3-thiazolidinedione moieties.
Compounds that are not glitazones but are agonists of PPAR sub-types are expected to be useful in the treatment of diabetes and associated conditions. PPARα agonists should improve the lipid profile and alleviate dyslipidemias by reducing elevated LDL levels and elevated triglyceride levels and/or increasing HDL levels. PPARγ agonists should improve insulin sensitivity, reducing the need for insulin injections in patients with NIDDM. The role of PPARδ is less well defined.
The class of compounds described herein is novel. Structurally similar kinds of compounds have been synthesized and invesigated for other uses, particularly as angiotensin II antagonists. A few related classes of compounds have also been reported to be modulators of arichidonic acid pathways (U.S. Pat. No. 4,748,272), to activate fatty acid oxidation in rats (S. M. Rangwala et al., Chirality (1997), 9, 37–47), or to have at least some hypoglycemic activity (T. C. Asthana et al., Indian J. Chem. (1970), 8, 1086–1095, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,748,272 and 6,110,963). These classes of compounds appear to have relatively low activity or to modulate glucose metabolism by a different mechanism than the compounds described herein (e.g. PTP-1B antagonism).
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The class of compounds described herein is a new class of PPAR agonists. The compounds in this class do not contain a 1,3-thiazolidinedione moiety in their molecular structure and therefore are not glitazones. This class of compounds includes compounds that are primarily PPARα agonists, compounds that are mixed PPARα/γ agonists, and to a lesser extent, compounds that are primarily PPARγ agonists. The clinical effects are expected to vary depending on the balance in agonism of the PPAR-subtypes. These compounds are useful in the treatment, control and/or prevention of diabetes, hyperglycemia, mixed or diabetic dyslipidemia, and other lipid disorders (including isolated hypercholesterolemia as manifested by elevations in LDL-C and/or non-HDL-C and/or hyperapoBliproteinemia, hypertriglyceridemia and/or increase in triglyceride-rich-lipoproteins, and/or low HDL cholesterol concentrations), atherosclerosis, obesity, vascular restenosis, inflammatory conditions, neoplastic conditions, and other PPARα and/or γ mediated diseases, disorders and conditions.
The present invention provides compounds having the structure of Formula I, including pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs of these compounds:
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00001
In the compounds of Formula I:
R1 is selected from the group consisting of (a) halogen, (b) C1-6 alkyl, where alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F, and (c) —OC1–C6 alkyl, where —OC1–C6 alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens, independently selected from Cl and F, with the proviso that R1 and R2 are not both CH3, further provided that if R1 is Cl and R3 is C4alkyl, then R7 is not 4-chlorophenoxy, and further provided that if R1 or R2 is propyl and R3 is acetyl, then the other of R1 and R2 is not methyl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of C1–C6 alkyl and C3–C12 Alicyclic, wherein alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F, and Alicyclic is optionally substituted with 1–5 halogens;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of C2–C6 alkyl, —C(O)C1–C6 alkyl, —C(O)Aryl, —C(O)C3–C12Alicyclic, —C(O)Heterocycle, —C(O)Heteroaryl, —OC1-6 alkyl, —OAryl, —OHeterocycle, and —OHeteroaryl, wherein alkyl in all occurrences may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from (a) 1–5 Cl and/or F atoms and/or (b) one Aryl or Heteroaryl; and wherein Aryl, Heterocycle, and Heteroaryl are optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of Cl, F, Br, linear or branched C1–C5 alkyl optionally substituted with 1–5 halogens, Aryl optionally substituted with 1–5 halogens, and linear or branched —OC1–C5 alkyl optionally substituted with 1–5 halogens;
—R4 is selected from the group consisting of H, —OH, —OC1–C6-alkyl, —OHeterocycle, —OHeteroaryl, and halogen, wherein —Oalkyl may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens independently selected from F and Cl, and wherein Heterocycle and Heteroaryl are optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from Cl, F, Br, C1–C5 alkyl and —OC1–C5 alkyl, where C1–C5 alkyl and —OC1–C5 alkyl may be linear or branched and optionally may be substituted with 1–5 halogens independently selected from Cl and F; or optionally,
R3 and R4 may be joined together to yield a 5- or 6-membered ring containing (a) 1–3 heteroatoms selected from O, N and S, (b) 2–5 carbon atoms, and (c) optionally one carbonyl group, wherein the 5- or 6-membered ring is fused to the benzene ring, and the benzene ring and fused 5- or 6-membered ring together form a Heteroaryl or Heterocycle which optionally contains one carbonyl group in the 5- or 6-membered fused ring and which is optionally substituted on the 5- or 6-membered fused ring with 1–2 substituents independently selected from R8;
R5 is H or Halogen;
R6 is selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, CH3 and CF3;
Each R7 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, C1–C6 alkyl, C1–C6 alkoxy, —SC1-6alkyl, —OAryl, C2–C6 alkenyl, C2–C6 alkynyl, —CN, —C(O)OC1–C3 alkyl, and —C(O)C1–C3alkyl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy and alkynyl and each alkyl portion of a substituent is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–5 halogen atoms and/or 1 substituent selected form Aryl and Heteroaryl, and each Aryl and Heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1–3 groups independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3;
Each R8 is independently selected from the group consisting of (a) —OC1–C5 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 F; (b) C1–C9 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with one Aryl, 1–5 halogens independently selected from Cl and F, and/or one —COOH; (c) Aryl; and (d) Heteroaryl; wherein Aryl and Heteroaryl are optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of Cl, F, C1–C5 alkyl, and —OC1–C5alkyl, wherein each alkyl and each —OC1–C5alkyl may be linear or branched, and is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen —OCH3, and —OCF3;
Aryl is an aromatic carbocyclic mono- or bicyclic ring system containing 6–10 atoms in the ring or rings;
Heteroaryl is a mono- or bicyclic aromatic ring system containing 4–11 atoms in the ring or rings, wherein at least one atom in the ring or rings is a heteroatom selected from N, O and S;
Heterocycle is a fully or partially saturated monocyclic or bicyclic ring system having 4–11 atoms in the ring or rings and at least one heteroatom selected from O, N, and S in the ring or rings;
Alicyclic is a substituent group that has one C3–C6cycloalkyl and one or more alkyl groups which may be linear or branched attached to the cycloalkyl group, wherein the point of attachment may be through the cycloalkyl or through an alkyl group;
Ar1 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl and pyridyl, and is optionally substituted with Aryl or 1–3 groups independently selected from R7;
X is O or S; and
Z is selected from the group consisting of —COOH, tetrazole, and —C(O)NHS(O)2R8.
These compounds are effective in lowering glucose, lipids, and insulin in diabetic animals. The compounds are expected to be efficacious in the treatment, control and/or prevention of non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM) in humans and in the treatment, control, and/or prevention of hyperlipidemia, dyslipidemia, obesity, hypercholesterolemia, hypertrigyceridemia, atherosclerosis, vascular restenosis, inflammatory conditions, neoplastic conditions, and other PPARα and/or γ mediated diseases, disorders and conditions in humans. Diseases, disorders and conditions from the latter group listed above often accompany NIDDM.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
The invention has numerous embodiments. Several groups and subgroups of compounds are described below:
One preferred embodiment comprises compounds having formula I in which X is O. Compounds in which X is S make up a second embodiment.
Another group comprises compounds having formula I in which Z is —CO2H.
A group of preferred compounds having formula I comprises compounds in which R3 is selected from C2–C6 alkyl, —C(O)C2–C6 alkyl, —C(O)Aryl, —C(O)C3–C12Alicyclic, and —OC1-6 alkyl, where alkyl in all occurrences is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from (a) 1–5 Cl and/or F atoms, and/or (b) one Aryl, where Aryl in all occurences is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from Cl, F, Br, and linear or branched C1–C5 alkyl optionally substituted with 1–5 halogens. A sub-group of compounds from this group comprises compounds in which R3 is selected from C2–C6 alkyl, —C(O)C2–C6 alkyl, —C(O)C3–C12Alicyclic, and —OC1-6 alkyl, where alkyl in all occurrences is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from (a) 1–5 Cl and/or F atoms, and/or (b) one Aryl, where Aryl in all occurences is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from Cl, F, Br, and linear or branched C1–C5 alkyl optionally substituted with 1–5 halogens.
A subset of compounds having formula I includes compounds in which R3 and R4 are as previously defined and are not joined together to yield a 5- or 6-membered ring fused to the phenoxy or thiophenoxy ring.
An alternative subset comprises compounds of this invention having formula 1a:
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00002

including pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs thereof, where
A-B and B—C are each connected by a bond. Optionally the bond between A-B or B—C can be a double bond, thereby yielding a five-membered ring fused to the benzene ring to which A and C are bonded, where A, B, and C are each independently selected from N, NR9, C, CR9, CR9 2, C═O, O, S, S(O), and S(O)2, where at least one of A, B, and C comprises a heteroatom selected from N, S and O that is in the ring (additional heteroatoms may also be attached to the ring; such as O in the form of a carbonyl or S oxide or S dioxide.
Each R9 is independently selected from R8 and H; and
R1, R2, R6, R7, R8, Ar1, X and Z are as defined in claim 1.
Many preferred compounds have formula I or Ia as defined above, where X is O and Z is —CO2H.
R6 is very often H in preferred compounds having Formula I or Ia.
In many preferred compounds having formula I or Ia as defined for any of the embodiments or subsets above, Ar1 is phenyl or pyridyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 groups independently selected from R7. The preferred choice for Ar1 is phenyl.
Preferred selections for substituent groups in any of the groups of compounds described above are the following:
R1 is selected from Cl, F, and C2–C4 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F. In a preferred group of compounds, the R1 groups are C2-4alkyl. Linear C2-4alkyl are preferred. Linear n-C3–C4 are very preferred.
R2 is C2–C4 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F. In many preferred compounds, R2 is linear or branched C2–C4 alkyl. Linear or branched C3–C4 alkyl is very preferred for R2, and n-C3–C4 alkyl is highly preferred.
R3 is —C(O)C2–C6alkyl or C3–C6alkyl, where each alkyl group may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–5-halogen. In many preferred compounds, R3 may be linear or branched —C(O)C2–C6alkyl, and in many compounds is linear or branched —C(O)C2–C4alkyl.
R4 is selected from H, —OH, —OC1–C6-alkyl, Cl and F, where —OC1–C6alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 F. In other preferred embodiments, R4 is H, Cl, F or —OH.
In a preferred group of compounds, R3 and R4 are joined together to form a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 1–3 heteroatoms selected from S, N, and O in the ring that is fused to the benzene ring to which R3 and R4 are attached. In many preferred compounds within this group, the benzene ring and 5- or 6-membered ring together form a fused ring system which is selected from benzisoxazole, benzisothiazole, benzthiazole, benzoxazole, quinoline, isoquinoline, chromene, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzimidazole, indole, benzoxazolone, benzisoxazolone; and benzimidazolone. The 5- or 6-membered ring containing a heteroatom is eptionally substituted with 1–2 substituents independently selected from R8. In a preferred embodiment, R3 and R4 are joined together to form a 5-membered ring fused to the benzene ring, yielding a heteroaromatic ring system. Ths heteroaromatic ring system is preferably selected from benzisoxazole, benzisothiazole, benzthiazole, benzoxazole, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzimidazole, indole, benzoxazolone, benzisoxazolone, and benzimidazolone.
R5 is preferably H.
In any of the above embodiments, R6 is often H, halogen, CH3, or CF3. R6 is preferably H.
In any of the above embodiments, R7 is C1–C6alkyl, —OAryl, C3–C12Alicyclic, —OC1–C6alkyl, —SC1–C6alkyl or —C(O)C1–C3alkyl, where alkyl in each occurrence is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens and/or one substituent selected from Aryl and Heteroaryl, and each Aryl and Heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3. In preferred compounds, each R7 is independently selected from F, Cl, C1–C4 alkyl, —OC1–C4 alkyl, —SC1–C4 alkyl, and —Ophenyl, wherein in each instance, alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–5 F, and —Ophenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3.
Each R8 is independently selected from halogen, C1–C3alkyl, and phenyl, wherein C1–C3alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens, and phenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3.
A preferred embodiment comprises compounds having formula I in which R3 and R4 are not joined together to yield a 5-membered ring, and the substituent groups are as follows:
R1 is Cl, F or linear or branched C2–C4alkyl;
R2 is linear or branched C2–C4alkyl;
R3 is linear or branched —C(O)C2–C4 alkyl;
R4 is H, Cl, F, or —OH;
R5 and R6 are H; and
Each R7 is independently selected from F, Cl, C1–C4 alkyl, —OC1–C4 alkyl, —SC1–C4 alkyl, and —Ophenyl, wherein in each instance, alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–5 F, and —Ophenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3.
In a preferred subgroup of compounds having formula I as defined immediately above, R1 and R2 are n-C3–C4 alkyl; R4 is selected from H, —OH, and F; and R3 is linear —C(O)C2–C4 alkyl. In many preferred compounds in this subgroup, Ar1 is phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 R7. A preferred group of compounds includes compounds in which R1 and R2 are n-propyl, R3 is —C(═O)C2H5, and R4 is H.
A subset of compounds having formula Ia as defined above includes compounds having the group -A-B—C—, in which the bonds between A and B and between B and C are optionally single or double bonds, where -A-B—C— is selected from the group consisting of:
  • —C(R9)═N—O—,
  • —C(R9)═N—S—,
  • —C(R9)2—N(R9)—O—,
  • —C(R9)2—N(R9)—S—,
  • —N(R9)—C(═O)—O—,
  • —N(R9)—C(═O)—S—,
  • —N(R9)—O—C(═O)—,
  • —N(R9)—S—C(═O)—,
  • —N═C(R9)—O—,
  • —N═C(R9)—S—,
  • —N(R9)—C(R9)2—O—,
  • —N(R9)—C(R9)2—S—,
  • —C(═O)—N(R9)—O—;
  • —C(═O)—N(R9)—S—;
  • —C(═O)—O—N(R9)—; and
  • —C(═O)—S—N(R9)—;
    and the group —C—B-A- is selected from the group consisting of:
  • —C(R9)═N—O—,
  • —C(R9)═N—S—,
  • —C(R9)2—N(R9)—O—,
  • —C(R9)2—N(R9)—S—,
  • —N(R9)—C(═O)—O—,
  • —N(R9)—C(═O)—S—,
  • —N(R9)—O—C(═O)—,
  • —N(R9)—S—C(═O)—,
  • —N═C(R9)—O—,
  • —N═C(R9)—S—,
  • —N(R9)—C(R9)2—O—,
  • —N(R9)—C(R9)2—S—,
  • —C(═O)—N(R9)—O—;
  • —C(═O)—N(R9)—S—;
  • —C(═O)—O—N(R9)—; and
  • —C(═O)—S—N(R9)—
Preferred compounds having Formula Ia as defined above include compounds in which A is CR9, C═O, or NR9; B is N, NR9, or C═O; and C is O. In more preferred compounds having formula Ia, the group -A-B—C— is selected from —C(R9)═N—O—, —C(═O)—N(R9)—O—, and —N(R9)—C(═O)—O—.
In preferred embodiments of the compounds having formula Ia described above, R1 is selected from Cl, F, and C2–C4 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F. In more preferred embodiments, R1 is Cl, F or linear or branched C2–C4alkyl, where C2–C4alkyl is not substituted. In very preferred embodiments, R1 is selected from Cl, F and n-C3–C4alkyl.
—Ar1 is phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 groups independently selected from R7.
In preferred embodiments, R2 is C2–C4 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F. Preferably, R2 is linear or branched C2–C4alkyl and is not substituted. In a very preferred group of compounds, R2 is n-C3–C4alkyl.
In preferred embodiments, R6 is selected from H, halogen, CH3, and CF3. Preferably, R6 is H.
In preferred embodiments, each R7 is independently selected from the group consisting of C1–C6alkyl, —OAryl, C3–C12Alicyclic, —OC1–C6alkyl, —SC1–C6alkyl and —C(O)C1–C3alkyl, wherein alkyl in each occurrence is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens, and Aryl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3. Preferably, each R7 is independently selected from F, Cl, C1–C4 alkyl, —OC1–C4 alkyl, —SC1–C4 alkyl, and —Ophenyl, wherein in each instance, alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–5 F, and —Ophenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3.
In preferred embodiments, R8 is independently selected from halogen, C1–C3alkyl, and phenyl, wherein C1–C3alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens, and phenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3. In preferred embodiments, R8 is selected from C1-5 alkyl, which is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 F, and phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3.
In preferred embodiments, each R9 is independently selected from R8 and H.
In preferred embodiments, Ar1 is generally phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 groups independently selected from R7.
In a preferred set of compounds having formula Ia, the group -A-B—C— is selected from —C(R9)═N—O—, —C(═O)—N(R9)—O—, and —N(R9)—C(═O)—O—;
R1 is selected from Cl, F and linear or branched C2–C4alkyl;
R2 is linear or branched C2–C4alkyl;
R6 is H;
Each R7 is independently selected from F, Cl, C1–C4 alkyl, —OC1–C4 alkyl, —SC1–C4 alkyl, and —Ophenyl, wherein in each instance, alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–5 F, and —Ophenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3; and
R8 is selected from C1-5 alkyl, which is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F, and phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3.
A preferred subgroup of the compounds described above includes compounds having formula Ia in which
R1 is selected from Cl, F and n-C3–C4alkyl;
R2 is n-C3–C4alkyl; and
Ar1 is phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 groups independently selected from R7.
Specific examples of compounds of this invention are provided as Examples 1–30. Their structures are illustrated in the Table immediately before the
EXAMPLES
The compounds are listed by name below. The following compounds, including pharmaceutically acceptable salts and prodrugs of these compounds, are specific embodiments of this invention:
Example 1 α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid Example 2 α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]4-chlorobenzeneacetic acid Example 3 α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]4-[(trifluoromethyl)thio]benzeneacetic acid Example 4 α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid Example 5 α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]4-(2-methylpropyl)benzeneacetic acid Example 6 α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid Example 7 α-[[5-chloro-7-propyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]4-chlorobenzeneacetic acid Example 8 α-[[5-chloro-3-ethyl-7-propyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid Example 9 α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-phenyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid Example 10 α-[[5-chloro-3-phenyl-7-propyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid Example 11 α-[(2,3-dihydro-2-methyl-3-oxo-5,7-dipropyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl)oxy]4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid Example 12 α-[(2,3-dihydro-3-(1-methylethyl)-2-oxo-5,7-dipropyl-1,3-benzoxazol-6-yl)oxy]4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid Example 13 α-[3-hydroxy-4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]benzeneacetic acid Example 14 α-[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]benzeneacetic acid Example 15 α-[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid Example 16 α-[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-4-(1-methylethoxy)benzeneacetic acid Example 17 α-[3-fluoro-4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid Example 18 α6-[phenyl(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxyl-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole Example 19 α6-[(4-chlorophenyl)(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole Example 20 6-[[4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl](1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxyl-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole Example 21 6-[(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole Example 22 6-[[4-(2-methylpropyl)phenyl](1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole Example 23 6-[(4-ethylphenyl)(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole Example 24 6-[(phenyl)(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-phenyl-1,2-benzisoxazole Example 25 1-[4-[[4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl](1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-3,5-dipropylphenyl]-1-propanone Example 26 α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]]-N-[(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)sulfonyl]benzeneacetamide Example 27 α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]]-N-[propylsulfonyl]benzeneacetamide Example 28 α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-3-thiopheneacetic acid Example 29 α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-3-pyridineacetic acid Example 30 α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]4-[pyridin-2-ylmethoxy]benzeneacetic acid Example 31 α-[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-3-pyridineacetic acid Example 32 α-[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy)-2-(2-phenyl-1,3-thiazol-4-yl)acetic acid; and Example 33 α-[2,6-dipropyl-4-[2-(5-methyl-2-phenyl-1,3-oxazol-4-yl)ethoxy]phenoxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetic acid
The invention further includes pharmaceutical compositions comprising any of the compounds described herein and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
The compounds as defined above are useful in treating, controlling, and preventing the following diseases, and may also be used in treating other diseases that are not listed below:
(1) a method for treating, controlling or preventing diabetes mellitus, and particularly non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus, in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I;
(2) a method for treating, controlling, or preventing hyperglycemia in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I;
(3) a method for treating, controlling, or preventing lipid disorders, hyperlipidemia, or low HDL in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I;
(4) a method for treating, controlling, or preventing obesity in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I;
(5) a method for treating, controlling, or preventing hypercholesterolemia in a mammalian patient-in need of such treatment which comprises administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I;
(6) a method for treating, controlling, or preventing hypertriglyceridemia in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I;
(7) a method for treating, controlling, or preventing dyslipidemia, including low HDL cholesterol, in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I;
(8) a method for treating, controlling, or preventing atherosclerosis in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I; it is understood that the sequellae of atherosclerosis (angina, claudication, heart attack, stroke, etc.) are thereby treated; and
(9) a method for treating, controlling, or preventing cachexia in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I.
Definitions
“Ac” is acetyl, which is CH3C(O)—.
“Alkyl”, as well as other groups having the prefix “alk”, such as alkoxy or alkanoyl, means carbon chains which may be linear or branched or combinations thereof, unless the carbon chain is defined otherwise. Examples of alkyl groups include methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, sec- and tert-butyl, pentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, and the like.
“Alkenyl” means carbon chains which contain at least one carbon-carbon double bond, and which may be linear or branched or combinations thereof. Examples of alkenyl include vinyl, allyl, isopropenyl, pentenyl, hexenyl, heptenyl, 1-propenyl, 2-butenyl, 2-methyl-2-butenyl, and the like.
“Alkynyl” means carbon chains which contain at least one carbon-carbon triple bond, and which may be linear or branched or combinations thereof. Examples of alkynyl include ethynyl, propargyl, 3-methyl-1-pentynyl, 2-heptynyl and the like.
“Cycloalkyl” means a saturated or partly saturated monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclic ring system each having from 3 to 12 carbon atoms, unless otherwise defined. The term also can include a monocyclic ring fused to an aryl group or other ring system. Examples of cycloalkyl include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptyl, and the like.
“Aryl” (and “arylene”) means mono- or bicyclic aromatic rings containing only carbon ring atoms. Aryl groups that are described herein are 6–10-membered monocyclic or bicyclic ring systems, and are preferably phenyl or naphthyl. Phenyl is most preferred. The term “aryl” also may describe an aryl group that is fused to a monocyclic cycloalkyl or monocyclic heterocyclic group. “Heterocycle” and “heterocyclic” means a fully or partially saturated monocyclic or bicyclic ring system containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, S and O in the ring, where the ring system has 4 to 11 atoms, except where defined otherwise. S may also have 1–2 O atoms bound to it that are not in. the ring itself. Examples of aryl include phenyl and naphthyl, as well as the phenyl ring of indanyl, indenyl, and tetrahydronaphthyl. Examples of aryl fused to heterocyclic groups include 2,3-dihydrobenzofuranyl, dihydrobenzopyranyl, and the like. Examples of heterocycles include tetrahydrofuran, piperazine, tetrahydropyran, and morpholine.
“Heteroaryl” (and heteroarylene) means a mono- or bicyclic aromatic ring system containing 4–11 atoms in the ring or rings, including at least one ring heteroatom selected from N, O and S in the ring or rings (including SO and SO2, where the O atoms are not in the ring). Heteroaryl also includes bicyclic aromatic rings having a heteroaromatic ring fused to a carbocyclic aromatic ring, such as benzene. Examples of heteroaryl include pyrrolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrazolyl, pyridyl, oxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, thiazolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, furanyl, triazinyl, thienyl, pyrimidyl, pyridazinyl, pyrazinyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothiophenyl (including S-oxide and dioxide), furo(2,3-b)pyridyl, quinolyl, indolyl, isoquinolyl and the like.
Preferred monocyclic heteroaryls are comprised of 5–6 membered rings having 1–3 heteroatoms in the ring, where the heteroatoms are selected from N, O and S. There may also be additional heteroatoms that are not part of the ring structure but are attached to the ring, such as carbonyl oxygens and O atoms attached to S atoms in the ring. Examples include furan, pyrrole, thiophene (including S-oxide and dioxide), oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, and pyridine. In a preferred subset of monocyclic heteroaryls, no more than one ring heteroatom is N.
Preferred bicyclic hetereoaryls comprise two fused rings having 9–10 atoms in the two rings, including 1–4 heteroatoms selected from N, O and S. There may also be additional heteroatoms that are not part of the ring structure but are attached to the ring, such as carbonyl oxygens and O atoms attached to S atoms in the ring. Examples include indole, benzofuran, benzothiophene (including S-oxide and dioxide), benzisoxazole, benzisothiazole, benzoxazole, benzisothiazole, benzopyran, furo(2,3-b)pyridine, quinoline, and isoquinoline. In a preferred subset of bicyclic heteroaryls, no more than one ring heteroatom is N.
“Halogen” includes fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine. Preferred halogens are chlorine and fluorine.
The term “composition,” as in pharmaceutical composition, is intended to encompass a product comprising the active ingredient(s), and the inert ingredient(s) that make up the carrier, as well as any product which results, directly or indirectly, from combination, complexation or aggregation of any two or more of the ingredients, or from dissociation of one or more of the ingredients, or from other types of reactions or interactions of one or more of the ingredients. Accordingly, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention encompass any composition made by admixing a compound of the present invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
In the description above and elsewhere, including the claims, when something is described as being “optional,” such as one or more substituents or compounds from one or more lists of substituents or compounds, one of the options is that the substituent or compound may be absent.
Optical Isomers—Diastereomers—Geometric Isomers—Tautomers
Compounds of Formula I, Ia and Ib (written collectively in this section as I) contain at least one asymmetric center and may contain more than one asymmetric center. The compounds can thus occur as racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, diastereomeric mixtures and individual diastereomers. The present invention is meant to comprehend all such isomeric forms of the compounds of Formula I.
Some of the compounds described herein contain olefinic double bonds, and unless specified otherwise, are meant to include both E and Z geometric isomers.
Some of the compounds described herein may exist with different points of attachment of hydrogen accompanied by one or more double bond shifts, referred to as tautomers. For example, a ketone and its enol form are keto-enol tautomers. The individual tautomers as well as mixtures thereof are encompassed with compounds of Formula I.
If desired, racemic mixtures of compounds of Formula I may be separated by the coupling of a racemic mixture of the compounds of Formula I to an enantiomerically pure compound to form a diastereomeric mixture, followed by separation of the individual diastereomers by standard methods, such as fractional crystallization or chromatography. The coupling reaction is often the formation of salts using an enantiomerically pure acid or base. The diasteromeric derivatives may then be converted to the pure enantiomers by cleavage of the added chiral residue. The racemic mixture of the compounds of Formula I can also be separated directly by chromatographic methods utilizing chiral stationary phases, which methods are well known in the art.
Alternatively, any enantiomer of a compound of the general Formula I may be obtained by stereoselective synthesis using optically pure starting materials or reagents of known configuration. Such methods are well known in the art.
Compounds of Formula I that have more than one asymmetric center and that occur as mixtures of diasteromers can similarly be separated into single diasteromers by standard methods, and these can be further separated to individual enantiomers as described above.
Salts
The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refers to salts prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic bases or acids including inorganic or organic bases and inorganic or organic acids. Salts derived from inorganic bases include aluminum, ammonium, calcium, copper, ferric, ferrous, lithium, magnesium, manganic salts, manganous, potassium, sodium, zinc, and the like. Particularly preferred are the ammonium, calcium, magnesium, potassium, and sodium salts. Salts in the solid form may exist in more than one crystal structure, and may also be in the form of hydrates. Salts derived from pharmaceutically acceptable organic non-toxic bases include salts of primary, secondary, and tertiary amines, substituted amines including naturally occurring substituted amines, cyclic amines, and basic ion exchange resins, such as arginine, betaine, caffeine, choline, N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine, diethylamine, 2-diethylaminoethanol, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, N-ethylmorpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, glucamine, glucosamine, histidine, hydrabamine, isopropylamine, lysine, methylglucamine, morpholine, piperazine, piperidine, polyamine resins, procaine, purines, theobromine, triethylamine, trimethylamine, tripropylamine, tromethamine, and the like.
When the compound of the present invention is basic, salts may be prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic acids, including inorganic and organic acids. Such acids include acetic, benzenesulfonic, benzoic, camphorsulfonic, citric, ethanesulfonic, fumaric, gluconic, glutamic, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, isethionic, lactic, maleic, malic, mandelic, methanesulfonic, mucic, nitric, pamoic, pantothenic, phosphoric, succinic, sulfuric, tartaric, p-toluenesulfonic acid, and the like. Particularly preferred are citric, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, maleic, phosphoric, sulfuric, and tartaric acids.
It will be understood that, as used herein, references to the compounds of Formula I are meant to also include the pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
Metabolites—Prodrugs
Metabolites of the compounds of this invention that are therapeutically active and that are defined in the claims also are within the scope of the invention. Metabolites of other compounds not claimed in this invention, where the metabolites are therapeutically active and are defined in the claims also are within the scope of the invention. Prodrugs, which are compounds that are converted or metabolized to the claimed compounds as they are being administered to a patient or after they have been administered to a patient are also included within the scope of this invention. A non-limiting example of a prodrug of the carboxylic acids of this invention would be an ester of the carboxylic acid group, for example a C1 to C6 ester, which may be linear or branched, or more typically, an ester which has functionality that makes it more easily hydrolyzed or metabolized after administration to a patient.
Examples of prodrugs of this class of compounds may be described as compounds having the Formula Ib:
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00003

R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, R9, Ar1, and X are as defined previously. In the prodrugs, R10 is a group that is easily removed under physiological conditions during or after administration to a mammalian patient to yield a compound in which R10 is —OH, or the carboxylate anion thereof (in solution), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. This corresponds to compounds of Formula I in which Z is COOH, or the carboxylate anion thereof (in solution), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Examples of prodrugs of Formula Ib include compounds in which R10 is selected from the group consisting of —OR11, —OCH2OR11, —OCH(CH3)OR11, —OCH2OC(O)R11, —OCH(CH3)OC(O)R11, —OCH2OC(O)OR11, —OCH(CH3)OC(O)OR11, and —NR12R12, where each R11 is independently selected from C1-6 alkyl optionally substituted with one or two groups selected from —CO2H, —CONH2, —NH2, —OH, —OAc, —NHAc, and phenyl; and wherein each R12 is independently selected from H and R11. Compounds having Formula Ib, where R10 has the chemical structure described above, are described herein as prodrugs. However, regardless of whether they are active as prodrugs, yielding compounds or salts of Formula I, or whether they have a different means of exhibiting pharmaceutical activity, the compounds of Formula Ib are included in this invention, regardless of the mechanism leading to their activity.
The description of utility, pharmaceutical compositions, combination therapies, administration, dosage, and the like that are described herein are applicable to the prodrugs described above and to the compounds described previously.
Utilities
Compounds of the present invention are potent agonists of varioius peroxisome proliferator activator receptor subtypes, particularly PPARα and/or PPARγ. Compounds of the present invention may be selective agonists of one receptor subtype, e.g. PPARγ or PPARα agonists, or they may be agonists of more than one receptor subtypes, e.g. dual PPARα/γ agonists. Compounds of the present invention are useful in treating, controlling or preventing diseases, disorders or conditions, wherein the treatment is mediated by the activation of an individual PPAR subtype (α or γ), or a combination of PPAR subtypes (e.g. α/γ). Thus one aspect of the present invention provides a method for the treatment, control or prevention of such diseases, disorders, or conditions in a mammal which comprises administering to such mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I. The diseases, disorders or conditions for which compounds of the present invention are useful in treating, controlling or preventing include, but are not limited to, (1) diabetes mellitus, and especially non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus (NIDDM), (2) hyperglycemia, (3) impaired glucose tolerance, (4) insulin resistance, (5) obesity, (6) lipid disorders, (7) dyslipidemia, (8) hyperlipidemia, (9) hypertriglyceridemia, (10) hypercholesterolemia, (11) low HDL levels, (12) high LDL levels, (13) atherosclerosis and its sequelae, (14) vascular restenosis, (15) irritable bowel syndrome, (16) inflammatory bowel disease, including Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis, (17) other inflammatory conditions, (18) pancreatitis, (19) abdominal obesity, (20) neurodegenerative disease, (21) retinopathy, (22) neoplastic conditions, (23) adipose cell tumors, (24) adipose cell carcinomas, such as liposarcoma, (25) prostate cancer and other cancers, including gastric, breast, bladder and colon cancers, (26) angiogenesis, (27) Alzheimer's disease, (28) psoriasis, (29) acne vulgaris, (30) other skin diseases and dermatological conditions modulated by PPAR, (31) high blood pressure, (32) Syndrome X, (33) ovarian hyperandrogenism (polycystic ovarian syndrome), and other disorders where insulin resistance is a component.
Another aspect of the invention provides a method for the treatment, control, or prevention of hypercholesterolemia, atherosclerosis, low HDL levels, high LDL levels, hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, and/or dyslipidemia, which comprises administering to a mammal in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of an agonist of PPARα and/or PPARγ or a PPARα/γ dual agonist. The PPAR agonist may be used alone or advantageously may be administered with a cholesterol biosynthesis inhibitor, including but not limited to, an HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor such as lovastatin, simvastatin, pravastatin, fluvastatin, atorvastatin, rivastatin, itavastatin, or ZD-4522. The PPAR agonist may also be used advantageously in combination with other lipid lowering drugs such as cholesterol absorption inhibitors (for example stanol esters, sterol glycosides such as tiqueside, and azetidinones such as ezetimibe), ACAT inhibitors (such as avasimibe), and with niacin, bile acid sequestrants, microsomal triglyceride transport inhibitors, and bile acid reuptake inhibitors. These combination treatments may also be effective for the treatment, control or prevention of one or more related conditions selected from the group consisting of hypercholesterolemia, atherosclerosis, hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, dyslipidemia, high LDL, and low HDL.
Another aspect of the invention provides a method of treating inflammatory conditions, including inflammatory bowel disease, Crohn's disease, and ulcerative colitis by administering an effective amount of a PPAR agonist, which may be a PPARα agonist, a PPARγ agonist, or a PPARα/γ dual agonist. Additional inflammatory diseases that may be treated with the instant invention include gout, rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, multiple sclerosis, asthma, ARDS, psoriasis, vasculitis, ischemia/reperfusion injury, frostbite, and related diseases.
Another aspect of the invention provides a method of treating cachexia. PPARα is known to be necessary for an appropriate energy sparing response to starvation, and inappropriate metabolism and energy utilization is clearly responsible for the wasting of cachexia.
Another aspect of the invention provides a method of treating a variety of skin diseases and dermatological conditions that are modulated by PPARα and/or γ agonists. These diseases and conditions include psoriasis and acne vulgaris. Examples of other skin diseases and dermatological disorders that may be treated include eczema; lupus associated skin lesions; dermatitides such as seborrheic dermatitis and solar dermatitis; keratoses such as seborrheic keratosis, senile keratosis, actinic keratosis, photo-induced keratosis, and keratosis follicularis; keloids and prophylaxis against keloid formation, warts inluding verruca, condyloma, or condyloma accuminatum, and human papilloma viral (HPV) infections such as venereal warts, viral warts, molluscum contagiosum, leukoplakia, lichen planus; keratitis, skin cancer such as basal cell carcinoma and cutaneous T cell lymphoma, and localized benign epidermal tumors (keratoderma, epidermal naevi).
Administration and Dose Ranges
Any suitable route of administration may be employed for providing a mammal, especially a human, with an effective dose of a compound of the present invention. For example, oral, rectal, topical, parenteral, ocular, pulmonary, nasal, and the like may be employed. Dosage forms include tablets, troches, dispersions, suspensions, solutions, capsules, creams, ointments, aerosols, and the like. Preferably compounds of Formula I are administered orally.
The effective dosage of active ingredient employed may vary depending on the particular compound employed, the mode of administration, the condition being treated and the severity of the condition being treated. Such dosage may be ascertained readily by a person skilled in the art.
When treating or preventing diabetes mellitus and/or hyperglycemia or hypertriglyceridemia or other diseases for which compounds of Formula I or Ia are indicated, generally satisfactory results are obtained when the compounds of the present invention are administered at a daily dosage of from about 0.1 milligram to about 100 milligram per kilogram of animal body weight, preferably given as a single daily dose or in divided doses two to six times a day, or in sustained release form. For most large mammals, the total daily dosage is from about 1.0 milligrams to about 1000 milligrams, preferably from about 1 milligrams to about 50 milligrams. In the case of a 70 kg adult human, the total daily dose will generally be from about 7 milligrams to about 350 milligrams. This dosage regimen may be adjusted to provide the optimal therapeutic response.
Pharmaceutical Compositions
Another aspect of the present invention provides pharmaceutical compositions which comprise a compound of Formula I and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention comprise a compound of Formula I or Ia or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrug thereof as an active ingredient, as well as a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and optionally other therapeutic ingredients. The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refers to salts prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic bases or acids including inorganic bases or acids and organic bases or acids.
The compositions include compositions suitable for oral, rectal, topical, parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, and intravenous), ocular (ophthalmic), pulmonary (nasal or buccal inhalation), or nasal administration, although the most suitable route in any given case will depend on the nature and severity of the conditions being treated and on the nature of the active ingredient. They may be conveniently presented in unit dosage form and prepared by any of the methods well-known in the art of pharmacy.
In practical use, the compounds of Formula I can be combined as the active ingredient in intimate admixture with a pharmaceutical carrier according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques. The carrier may take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration, e.g., oral or parenteral (including intravenous). In preparing the compositions for oral dosage form, any of the usual pharmaceutical media may be employed, such as, for example, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, coloring agents and the like in the case of oral liquid preparations, such as, for example, suspensions, elixirs and solutions; or carriers such as starches, sugars, microcrystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents and the like in the case of oral solid preparations such as, for example, powders, hard and soft capsules and tablets, with the solid oral preparations being preferred over the liquid preparations.
Because of their ease of administration, tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit form in which case solid pharmaceutical carriers are obviously employed. If desired, tablets may be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques. Such compositions and preparations should contain at least 0.1 percent of active compound. The percentage of active compound in these compositions may, of course, be varied and may conveniently be between about 2 percent to about 60 percent of the weight of the unit. The amount of active compound in such therapeutically useful compositions is such that an effective dosage will be obtained. The active compounds can also be administered intranasally as, for example, liquid drops or spray.
The tablets, pills, capsules, and the like may also contain a binder such as gum tragacanth, acacia, corn starch or gelatin; excipients such as dicalcium phosphate; a disintegrating agent such as corn starch, potato starch, alginic acid; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate; and a sweetening agent such as sucrose, lactose or saccharin. When a dosage unit form is a capsule, it may contain, in addition to materials of the above type, a liquid carrier such as a fatty oil.
Various other materials may be present as coatings or to modify the physical form of the dosage unit. For instance, tablets may be coated with shellac, sugar or both. A syrup or elixir may contain, in addition to the active ingredient, sucrose as a sweetening agent, methyl and propylparabens as preservatives, a dye and a flavoring such as cherry or orange flavor.
Compounds of formula I may also be administered parenterally. Solutions or suspensions of these active compounds can be prepared in water suitably mixed with a surfactant such as hydroxy-propylcellulose. Dispersions can also be prepared in glycerol, liquid polyethylene glycols and mixtures thereof in oils. Under ordinary conditions of storage and use, these preparations contain a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.
The pharmaceutical forms suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersions. In all cases, the form must be sterile and must be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (e.g. glycerol, propylene glycol and liquid polyethylene glycol), suitable mixtures thereof, and vegetable oils.
Combination Therapy
Compounds of Formula I may be used in combination with other drugs that may also be useful in the treatment, prevention, suppression or amelioration of the diseases or conditions for which compounds of Formula I are useful. Such other drugs may be administered, by a route and in an amount commonly used therefor, contemporaneously or sequentially with a compound of Formula I. When a compound of Formula I is used contemporaneously with one or more other drugs, a pharmaceutical composition in unit dosage form containing such other drugs and the compound of Formula I is preferred. However, the combination therapy also includes therapies in which the compound of Formula I and one or more other drugs are administered on different overlapping schedules. It is also contemplated that when used in combination with one or more other active ingredients, the compound of the present invention and the other active ingredients may be used in lower doses than when each is used singly. Accordingly, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention include those that contain one or more other active ingredients, in addition to a compound of Formula I.
Examples of other active ingredients that may be administered in combination with a compound of Formula I, and either administered separately or in the same pharmaceutical composition, include, but are not limited to:
(a) insulin sensitizers including (i) PPARγ agonists such as the glitazones (e.g. troglitazone, pioglitazone, englitazone, MCC-555, rosiglitazone, and the like), and compounds disclosed in WO97/27857, 97/28115, 97/28137 and 97/27847; (ii) biguanides such as metformin and phenformin; (iii) protein tyrosine phosphatase-1B (PTP-1B) inhibitors, and (iv) dipeptidyl peptidase IV (DPP-IV) inhibitors;
(b) insulin or insulin mimetics;
(c) sulfonylureas such as tolbutamide and glipizide, or related materials;
(d) α-glucosidase inhibitors (such as acarbose);
(e) cholesterol lowering agents such as (i) HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors (lovastatin, simvastatin, pravastatin, fluvastatin, atorvastatin, rivastatin, itavastatin, ZD-4522 and other statins), (ii) sequestrants (cholestyramine, colestipol, and dialkylaminoalkyl derivatives of a cross-linked dextran), (iii) nicotinyl alcohol, nicotinic acid or a salt thereof, (iv) PPARα agonists such as fibric acid derivatives (clofibrate, fenofibrate and bezafibrate) or gemfibrozil, (v) PPARα/γ dual agonists, such as KRP-297, (vi) inhibitors of cholesterol absorption, such as for example ezetimibe, (vii) acyl CoA: cholesterol acyltransferase inhibitors, such as for example avasimibe, and (viii) anti-oxidants, such as probucol;
(f) PPARδ agonists such as those disclosed in WO97/28149;
(g) antiobesity compounds (anorectics) such as fenfluramine, dexfenfluramine, phentermine, sibutramine, mazindol, orlistat, lipase inhibitors, neuropeptide Y5 inhibitors, and β3 adrenergic receptor agonists;
(h) an ileal bile acid transporter inhibitor; and
(i) agents intended for use in inflammatory conditions such as aspirin, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, glucocorticoids, azulfidine, and cyclo-oxygenase 2 selective inhibitors.
The above combinations include combinations of a compound of the present invention not only with one other active compound, but also with two or more other active compounds. Non-limiting examples include combinations of compounds having Formula I with two or more active compounds selected from biguanides, sulfonylureas, HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors, other PPAR agonists, PTP-1B inhibitors, DPP-IV inhibitors, and anti-obesity compounds.
Biological Assays
A) PPAR Binding Assays
For preparation of recombinant human PPARγ, PPARδ, and PPARα: Human PPARγ2, human PPARδ and human PPARα were expressed as gst-fusion proteins in E. coli. The full length human cDNA for PPARγ2 was subcloned into the pGEX-2T expression vector (Pharmacia). The full length human cDNAs for PPARδ and PPARα were subcloned into the pGEX-KT expression vector (Pharmacia). E. coli containing the respective plasmids were propagated, induced, and harvested by centrifugation. The resuspended pellet was broken in a French press and debris was removed by centrifugation at 12,000×g. Recombinant human PPAR receptors were purified by affinity chromatography on glutathione sepharose. After application to the column, and one wash, receptor was eluted with glutathione. Glycerol (10%) was added to stabilize the receptor and aliquots were stored at −80° C.
For binding to PPARγ, an aliquot of receptor was incubated in TEGM (10 mM Tris, pH 7.2, 1 mM EDTA, 10% glycerol, 7 μL/100 mL β-mercaptoethanol, 10 mM Na molybdate, 1 mM dithiothreitol, 5 μg/mL aprotinin, 2 μg/mL leupeptin, 2 μg/mL benzamidine and 0.5 mM PMSF) containing 0.1% non-fat dry milk and 10 nM [3H2] AD5075, (21 Ci/mmole), ±test compound as described in Berger et al., Novel peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor (PPARγ) and PPARδ ligands produce distinct biological effects, J. Biol. Chem. (1999), 274, 6718–6725.) Assays were incubated for ˜16 hr at 4° C. in a final volume of 150 μL. Unbound ligand was removed by incubation with 100 μL dextran/gelatin-coated charcoal, on ice, for ˜10 min. After centrifugation at 3000 rpm for 10 min at 4° C., 50 μL of the supernatant fraction was counted in a Topcount.
For binding to PPARδ, an aliquot of receptor was incubated in TEGM (10 mM Tris, pH 7.2, 1 mM EDTA, 10% glycerol, 7 μL/100 mL β-mercaptoethanol, 10 mM Na molybdate, 1 mM dithiothreitol, 5 μg/mL aprotinin, 2 μg/mL leupeptin, 2 μg/mL benzamide and 0.5 mM PMSF) containing 0.1% non-fat dry milk and 2.5 nM [3H2]3-chloro-4-(3-(7-propyl-3-trifluoromethyl-6-benz-[4,5]-isoxazoloxy)propylthio)phenylacetic acid (17 Ci/mmole), ±test compound as described in Berger et al., Novel peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor (PPARγ) and PPARδ ligands produce distinct biological effects, J. Biol. Chem. (1999), 274, 6718–6725). [3H2]3-chloro-4-(3-(7-propyl-3-trifluoromethyl-6-benz-[4,5]-isoxazoloxy)propylthio)phenylacetic acid as a non-labelled compound is taught in Ex. 20 of WO 97/28137. Assays were incubated for ˜16 hr at 4° C. in a final volume of 150 μL. Unbound ligand was removed by incubation with 100 μL dextran/gelatin-coated charcoal, on ice, for ˜10 min. After centrifugation at 3000 rpm for 10 min at 4° C., 50 μL of the supernatant fraction was counted in a Topcount.
For binding to PPARα, an aliquot of receptor was incubated in TEGM (10 mM Tris, pH 7.2, 1 mM EDTA, 10% glycerol, 7 μL/100 mL β-mercaptoethanol, 10 mM Na molybdate, 1 mM dithiothreitol, 5 μg/mL aprotinin, 2 μg/mL leupeptin, 2 μg/mL benzamide and 0.5 mM PMSF) containing 0.1% non-fat dry milk and 5.0 nM [3H2](3-(4-(3-phenyl-7-propyl-6-benz-[4,5]-isoxazoloxy)butyloxy))phenylacetic acid (34 Ci/mmole), ±test compound. This is a tritium labelled variant of Ex.62 in WO 97/28137. Assays were incubated for ˜16 hr at 4° C. in a final volume of 150 μL. Unbound ligand was removed by incubation with 100 μL dextran/gelatin-coated charcoal, on ice, for ˜10 min. After centrifugation at 3000 rpm for 10 min at 4° C., 50 μL of the supernatant fraction was counted in a Topcount.
B). Gal-4 hPPAR Transactivation Assays
The chimeric receptor expression constructs, pcDNA3-hPPARγ/GAL4, pcDNA3-hPPARδ/GAL4, pcDNA3-hPPARα/GAL4 were prepared by inserting the yeast GALA transcription factor DBD adjacent to the ligand binding domains (LBDs) of hPPARγ, hPPARδ, hPPARα, respectively. The reporter construct, pUAS(5×)-tk-luc was generated by inserting 5 copies of the GAL4 response element upstream of the herpes virus minimal thymidine kinase promoter and the luciferase reporter gene. pCMV-lacZ contains the galactosidase Z gene under the regulation of the cytomegalovirus promoter. COS-1 cells were seeded at 12×103 cells/well in 96 well cell culture plates in high glucose Dulbecco's modified Eagle medium (DMEM) containing 10% charcoal stripped fetal calf serum (Gemini Bio-Products, Calabasas, Calif.), nonessential amino acids, 100 units/ml Penicillin G and 100 mg/ml Streptomycin sulfate at 37° C. in a humidified atmosphere of 10% CO2. After 24 h, transfections were performed with Lipofectamine (GIBCO BRL, Gaithersburg, Md.) according to the instructions of the manufacturer. Briefly, transfection mixes for each well contained 0.48 μl of Lipofectamine, 0.00075 μg of pcDNA3-PPAR/GAL4 expression vector, 0.045 μg of pUAS(5×)-tk-luc reporter vector and 0.0002 μg of pCMV-lacZ as an internal control for transactivation efficiency. Cells were incubated in the transfection mixture for 5 h at 37° C. in an atmosphere of 10% CO2. The cells were then incubated for ˜48 h in fresh high glucose DMEM containing 5% charcoal stripped fetal calf serum, nonessential amino acids, 100 units/ml Penicillin G and 100 mg/ml Streptomycin sulfate±increasing concentrations of test compound. Since the compounds were solubilized in DMSO, control cells were incubated with equivalent concentrations of DMSO; final DMSO concentrations were ≦0.1%, a concentration which was shown not to effect transactivation activity. Cell lysates were produced using Reporter Lysis Buffer (Promega, Madison, Wis.) according to the manufacturer's instructions. Luciferase activity in cell extracts was determined using Luciferase Assay Buffer (Promega, Madison, Wis.) in an ML3000 luminometer (Dynatech Laboratories, Chantilly, Va.). β-galactosidase activity was determined using β-D-galactopyranoside (Calbiochem, San Diego, Calif.).
C. In vivo Studies
Male db/db mice (10–11 week old C57B1/KFJ, Jackson Labs, Bar Harbor, Me.) were housed 5/cage and allowed ad lib. access to ground Purina rodent chow and water. The animals, and their food, were weighed every 2 days and were dosed daily by gavage with vehicle (0.5% carboxymethylcellulose)±test compound at the indicated dose. Drug suspensions were prepared daily. Plasma glucose, and triglyceride concentrations were determined from blood obtained by tail bleeds at 3–5 day intervals during the study period. Glucose, and triglyceride, determinations were performed on a Boehringer Mannheim Hitachi 911 automatic analyzer (Boehringer Mannheim, Indianapolis, Ind.) using heparinized plasma diluted 1:6 (v/v) with normal saline. Lean animals were age-matched heterozygous mice maintained in the same manner.
Table of Compounds
The table below illustrates compounds that were synthesized in accordance with the present invention. Detailed syntheses are provided in the Examples.
Example 1
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00004
Example 2
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00005
Example 3
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00006
Example 4
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00007
Example 5
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00008
Example 6
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00009
Example 7
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00010
Example 8
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00011
Example 9
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00012
Example 10
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00013
Example 11
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00014
Example 12
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00015
Example 13
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00016
Example 14
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00017
Example 15
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00018
Example 16
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00019
Example 17
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00020
Example 18
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00021
Example 19
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00022
Example 20
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00023
Example 21
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00024
Example 22
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00025
Example 23
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00026
Example 24
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00027
Example 25
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00028
Example 26
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00029
Example 27
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00030
Example 28
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00031
Example 29
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00032
Example 30
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00033
Example 31
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00034
Example 32
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00035
Example 33
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00036
Synthetic Methods
Processes that are used in making compounds of the instant invention are described in general terms below. Syntheses of specific compounds are provided in the Examples section.
Electrophilic Partner
Typical processes for the preparation of the compounds of interest are shown in the figures below. One particularly versatile preparative route to racemic 2-(aryloxy)-2-arylacetic acids is the coupling of a phenol and an electrophilic arylacetic acid derivative. Electrophilic phenylacetic acid derivatives are readily available from either the parent arylacetic acids by deprotonation and quenching with a halogen source such as N-bromosuccinimde or by bromination of the corresponding 2-aryl(2-hydroxy)acetic acid. In some cases the intermediate 2-aryl(2-hydroxy)acetic acid is easily prepared from the Friedel Crafts acylation of an aryl residue with ethyl oxalyl chloride followed by ketone reduction. Subsequent halogenation yields the necessary 2-bromo phenylacetic acid as in the illustrated example derived from cumene.
Preparation of the required arylacetic acids, mandelic acids and other substrates is readily done by practitioners in the field of synthetic organic chemistry.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00037
For cases where the preparation of the single enantiomer of a 2-(aryloxy)-2-arylacetic acid is desired, an electrophilic partner incorporating a lactamide chiral auxiliary is used. Two procedures for the facile preparation of the desired electrophile are either by coupling of the appropriate (R) or (S) pyrrolidine lactamide with a racemic 2-haloarylacetic acid or by a route similar to the Friedel Crafts acylation reported above. The detailed chemistry of this diastereoselective condensation is described in Paul F. Devine, et alii Tet Let 37(16), 2683–2686, 1996. Preparation of typical mandelate lactamide esters are also described there.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00038
Several alternative synthetic routes to this class of compounds have been described in the literature. For examples see Chirality 11, 482–486, 1999 for a route to enantiomerically enriched products, and Chirality 9, 37–47, 1997 for Mitsunobu displacements leading to racemic compounds.
Synthesis of Phenol Fragments
The phenol partners for the desired compounds are generally avilable through standard transformations of commercially available phenols or resorcinols. Typical examples are shown below for ketoresorcinol, ketophenol and benzisoxazole classes.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00039

Coupling and hydrolysis to a 2-(aryloxy)-2-arylacetic acids
The 2-(aryloxy)-2-arylacetic acids are prepared from the above partners by coupling in the presence of base. For racemic examples the partners are coupled using a base in a polar solvent such as Cs2CO3 in DMF or K2CO3 in acetone. Couplings in acetone may require heating. For the diastereoselective coupling of the lactamide esters, phenolic partners are deprotonated with a lithium alkoxide base in aprotic solvent and added to the bromide partner in ThF at low temperature, typically −30° to −40° C. Most couplings are then allowed to proceed to completion at −20° C. to 0° C. Isolation of the products uses standard methods.
Cleavage of the ester yields the desired acid product. Racemic examples are cleaved in basic alcohol or basic aqueous mixed solvents by standard means. Due to a proclivity towards base induced racemization, the lactamide auxiliaries are cleaved by standard methods using LiOOH.
The enantiomeric excess of the final product is typically determined using any of several commercially available chiral stationary phase HPLC columns.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00040
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00041

Alternate Non-basic Condensation
An alternate coupling protocol for the same type of partners involves the insertion of the acidic phenol into a diazo intermediate. The alpha-diazo intermediates are readily prepared by known methods from either arylacetic acids (Villalgordo, J. M.; Enderli, A.; Linden, A.; Heimgartner, H.; Helv Chim Acta 1995, 78 (8), 1983–1998) or alpha-keto acids (Shi, G.; Cai, W.; J Chem Soc, Perkin Trans 1 1996, (19), 2337–2338).
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00042

Tetrazole Synthesis
The tetrazole analogs of the 2-(aryloxy)-2-arylacetic acids are accessible by any of several standard conversions of the final acids or appropriately protected intermediates to nitrites and then to tetrazoles. The following example is typical of conditions used.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00043
Acyl Sulfonamides
The acyl sulfonamides were prepared from the carboxylic acids by standard procedures. For the example given, an activated carboxylate was coupled with a sulfonamide in the presence of base to give the desired acid surrogate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00044
EXAMPLES
The following Examples are provided to illustrate the invention, including methods used to make the compounds, and are not to be construed as limiting the invention in any manner. The scope of the invention is defined in the appended claims.
EXAMPLES
The following Examples are provided to illustrate the invention, including methods of making the compounds of the invention, and are not to be construed as limiting the invention in any manner.
Example 1
Step 1 Preparation of 2,4-dipropylresorcinol
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00045
Commercially available 2-propylresorcinol (55 gm) was dissolved in acetone (650 ml). Allyl Bromide (100 ml) and K2CO3 (152 Gm) were added. The mixture was stirred briefly at RT followed by heating under reflux. Additional allyl bromide (20 ml) was added at 3.5 Hrs. Heating was stopped at 8 Hrs. The cooled mixture was filtered and the cake washed with acetone. The acetone filtrate was diluted with ethyl ether (1L), washed with brine and dried over MgSO4. The organic extracts were reduced i. vac. The crude allyl ether was used in the following step.
The allyl ether (0.5 mol) was dissoved in ortho-dichlorobenzene (500 ml) and the reaction vessel purged with nitrogen. The mixture was heated under reflux 24 Hrs followed by cooling to RT. The reaction mixture was diluted with hexanes (1L) and extracted twice with 2 N NaOH (500 ml). The aqueous phase was washed twice with ether and washes discarded. The aqueous phase was acidified with 2N HCl and extracted three times with ether. Combined ether extracts from the acidified aqueous phase were washed with brine and dried over MgSO4. Extracts were reduced in vac. The product was purified by elution from a silica gel column (1.5 Kilo E. Merck 40–63 μ) with 3L 1:1 CH2Cl2:Hexanes, 5L 3:1 CH2Cl2:Hexanes and 100% CH2Cl2.
The product 2,6-bis-allylresorcinol (33.5 gm) was dissolved in methanol and hydrogenated under H2 Pressure (initial pressure 45 psig) over 10% Pd on carbon (300 mg). The reaction mixture was filtered through celite and reduced i. vac. The crude oil was flushed through a short SiO2 gel column eluting with ethyl ether. The resulting oil was purified by crystallization from hexanes:ether.
Step 2 Preparation of 2,4-dihydroxy-3,5-dipropyl-1′,1′,1′-trifluoroacetophenone
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00046
A mixture of 2,6-dipropylresorcinol (3.28 grams) with aluminum chloride (8.56 grams) in dichloromethane (100.0 mL) was cooled to 0° C. Trifluoroacetic anhydride (3.96 mL) was added dropwise over 30 minutes. This mixture was allowed to warm to RT and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was partitioned between methylene choride and water. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and filtered. The solvent was evaporated and the resulting solid was chromatographed on silica gel using ethyl acetate and hexane (4:96) to give the titled compound.
NMR (CDCl3) σ7.45 (brd m, 1H), 5.65 (s, 1H), 2.66 (collapsed dd, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.56 (collapsed dd, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.65 (m, 4H), 1.01 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.00 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 3H).
MS ESI 291 M+1.
Step 3 Preparation of 5,7-dipropyl-6-hydroxy-3-trifluoromethyl-1,2-benzisoxazole
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00047
A mixture of 2,4-dihydroxy-3,5-dipropyl-1′,1′,1′-trifluoroacetophenone(1.0 gram), sodium acetate (3.53 grams), hydroxylamine hydrochloride (2.63 grams) and methanol (20 mL) was refluxed overnight. The solvent was then evaporated and the resulting solid was partitioned between ethyl acetate and water. The organic phase was separated and washed with brine. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give an oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using ethyl acetate and hexane (4:96) to give the indicated oxime. The oil was then dissolved in acetic anhydride (4 ml). The solution was stirred for six hours, then the acetic anhydride was evaporated in vac. to give an oil. This was dissolved in pyridine and refluxed 3 Hrs. The pyridine was removed in vac. and the resulting paste partitioned between ethyl acetate and 1 N HCl. The organic phase was seperated and washed with brine. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give an oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using ethyl acetate and hexane (3:97) to give the indicated benzisoxazole.
NMR (CDCl3) σ7.37 (brd m, 1H), 5.33 (s, 1H), 2.93 (collapsed dd, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.71 (collapsed dd, J=7.7 Hz, 2H), 1.73 (m, 4H), 1.033 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.025 (t, J=7.4 Hz, 3H).
MS ESI 288.3 M+1.
Step 4 Preparation of Methyl α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00048
Methyl 2-bromo-2-phenylacetate (9.16 gm 1.05 eq), Cs2CO3 (10.03 grams, 1.05 eq) and the indicated benzisoxazole (10.93 grams, 1.0 eq) were combined in 100 ml DMF at room temperature. The mixture was stirred 19 Hrs. The suspension was poured into 1 L 1 N HCl and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was separated and washed with water followed by brine. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give an oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using ethyl acetate and hexanes (4:96) to give the titled compound.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.51–7.53 (m, 2H), 7.41–7.45 (m, 4H), 5.26 (s, 1H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 2.73 (m, 2H), 2.55 (m, 2H), 1.5–1.7 (m, 4H), 0.884 (t, 3H, J=7.4 Hz), 0.877 (t, 3H, J=7.4 Hz).
Step 5 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00049
The ester (15 grams, 1.0 Eq) was dissolved in 90% methanol water (300 ml). Approximately 10% (vol/vol) THF was added. Aqueous NaOH (1.02 M, 38 ml) was added. The mixture was left to stand 5 Hrs. Solvent volume was reduced by approximately 50% in vac. and the resulting solution acidified to pH 2 with 1 N HCl. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was separated and washed with water followed by brine. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give an oil. The resulting oil was crystallized from hexanes to give the titled compound.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.41–7.53 (m, 6H), 2.71 (m, 2H), 2.53 (m, 2H), 1.5–1.7 (m, 4H), 0.862 (t, 3H, J=7.4 Hz).
Example 2
Step, 1 Preparation of Methyl 2-Bromo-2-(4-chlorophenyl)acetate
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00050
Commercially available 4-Cl mandelic acid was esterified with methanol and catalytic sulfuric acid. The crude ester (10 gm, 1.0 eq) was dissoved in acetonitrile (75 ml) with triphenylphosphine (15.7 gm, 1.2 eq) and cooled to 0° C. Solid CBr4 (19.9 gm, 1.2 eq) was added over approximately 5 mins. The solution was stirred 5 minutes at 0° C. and allowed to warm to RT. The reaction mixture was loaded directly onto a SiO2 (1 kg) column for purification. The title compound was eluted with hexanes and ethyl acetate (97:3).
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.45 (aromatic ABq, 4H, J=8.6 Hz, Δσ=57.8 Hz), 5.33 (s, 1H), 3.81 (s, 3H).
Step 2 Preparation of Methyl α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00051
The title ester was prepared as was described for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (10.7 gm, 1.05 eq) and phenol (11.2 gm, 1.0 eq). The resulting solid was purified by chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate and hexane (4:96) as eluent to give the titled compound.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.45 (aromatic ABq, 4H, J=8.4 Hz, Δσ=23.6 Hz), 5.24 (s, 1H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 2.75 (m, 2H), 2.56 (m, 2H), 1.5–1.7 (m, 4H), 0.904 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz), 0.87 (t, 3H, J=7.2 Hz).
Step 3 Preparation of α-([-[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00052
The title acid was prepared as was described for example 1, step 5 from the indicated ester (18.9 gm, 1.0 eq) and NaOH (39.4 ml, 1.02 M, 1.0 eq). The resulting oil was crystallized from hexanes to give the titled compound.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.45 (aromatic ABq, 4H, J=8.3 Hz, Δσ=15.1 Hz), 5.28 (s, 1H), 2.77 (m, 2H), 2.54 (m, 2H), 1.5–1.7 (m, 4H), 0.886 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz), 0.875 (t, 3H, J=7.2 Hz).
Example 3
Step 1 Preparation of Methyl 2-Bromo-2-(4-trifluoromethylthiophenyl)acetate
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00053
Commercially available 4-(trifluoromethylthio) phenylacetic acid (0.950 g,) was dissolved in ether (20 mL). Diazomethane was added until the reaction mixture remained yellow. Excess diazomethane was destroyed and the solution was reduced i. vac. The crude oil was cooled to −78° C. in THF (100 mL). Lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide (5.5 mL, 1.1 eq) was added to the reaction and stirred for 20 minutes. Chlorotrimethylsilane (0.875 mL, 1.875 eq) was added at −78° C. and stirred for 20 minutes. N-bromosuccinimide (0.938 g, 1.05 eq) was added to the reaction mixture. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir and warm to room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with H2O. The organic layer was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give a yellow oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using hexanes:ethyl acetate (95:5) to give methyl 2-bromo-2-(4-trifluoromethylthiophenyl)acetate.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 7.64 (d, 2H), 7.70 (d 2H), 5.37 (s, 1H), 3.82 (s, 3H)
Step 2 Preparation of Methylα-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-[(trifluoromethyl)thio]benzeneacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00054
The title ester was prepared as was described for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (85 mg) and the indicated phenol (74 mg). The product was purified by silica gel chromatography (toluene) to yield the desired ester.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 7.74 (d, 2H), 7.62 (dd, 2H), 7.42 (s, 1H), 5.30 (s 1H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 2.75 (m, 2H), 2.55 (m, 2H), 1.63 (m, 4H), 0.88 (m, 6H).
Step 3 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-[(trifluoromethyl)thio]benzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00055
The title acid was prepared as was described for example 1, step 5 from the indicated ester (105 mg, 1.0 eq) and NaOH (0.49 mL, 2 M, 2.5 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 7.74 (d, 2H), 7.63 (d, 2H), 5.30 (s, 1H), 2.76 (m, 2H), 2.58 (m, 2H), 1.61 (m, 4H), 0.92 (m, 6H),
Example 4
Step 1 Preparation of Methyl α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00056
The title ester was prepared as was described for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (54 mg) and the indicated phenol (57 mg). The product was purified by silica gel chromatography (hexanes:ethyl acetate 95:5) to yield the desired ester.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 7.42 (d, 2H), 7.39 (s, 1H), 7.28 (d, 2H), 5.42 (s, 1H), 3.56 (s, 3H), 2.95 (m, 1H), 2.63 (m, 4H), 1.61 (m, 4H), 1.38 (d, 6H), 0.89 (m, 6H)
Step 2 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00057
The title acid was prepared as was described for example 1, step 5 from the indicated ester (85 mg, 1.0 eq) and NaOH (0.356 mL, 5 M, 2.5 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.42 (m, 3H), 7.28 (d, 2H), 5.25 (s, 1H). 2.95 (m, 1H), 2.61 (m, 4H), 1.60 (m, 4H), 1.38 (d, 6H), 0.85 (m, 6H),
Example 5
Step 1 Preparation of Methyl 4-(2-methylpropyl)phenylacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00058
Sulfur (5.0 g, 156 mmol), 4-isobutyl acetophenone (14.4 g, 82 mmol) and morpholine (20 mL) were combined and heated under reflux for 18 hrs. The morpholine was distilled from the reaction leaving a dark residue. The residue was cooled to ambient temperature then treated with Conc. HCl/HOAc 1/1 (50 mL) and heated under reflux for 24 hrs. The volatiles were then distilled from the dark reaction mixture. The residue was suspended in acetone then filtered to remove a colorless solid. The filtrate was treated with decolorizing charcoal, filtered through Celite and concentrated to give an orange solid. The crude solid was suspended in ether and treated with excess diazomethane, let stand for 1 hour. Excess diazomethane was destroyed and the solution concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography to yield the desired product.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.12 (ABq, 4H), 3.72 (s, 3H), 3.61 (s, 2H), 2.45 (d, 2H), 1.90 (m, 1H), 0.96 (d, 6H).
Step 2 Preparation of Methyl 2-Bromo-2-(4-(2-methylpropyl)phenyl)acetate
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00059
The bromide was prepared following the procedure of Example 3, Step 1 to give the desired compound as an oil.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.10 (ABq, 4H), 5.15 (s, 1H), 3.72 (s, 3H), 2.45 (d, 2H), 1.90 (m, 1H), 0.96 (d, 6H).
Step 3 Preparation of Methyl α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-(2-methylpropyl)benzeneacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00060
The title ester was prepared as for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (82.3 mg, 0.2 mmol) and the indicated phenol (82.8 g, 0.29 mmol). The product was purified by silica gel chromatography (toluene) to yield the desired ester.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.45 (aromatic ABq, 4H), 5.28 (s, 1H), 3.70 (s, 3H), 2.77 (m, 2H), 2.54 (m, 2H), 2.45 (d, 2H), 1.90 (m, 1H), 1.5–1.7 (m, 4H), 0.95 (d, 6H), 0.88 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz), 0.87 (t, 3H).
4 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-(2-methylpropyl)benzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00061
The title acid was prepared as for example 1, step 5 from the indicated ester (100 mg, 1.0 eq) and NaOH (0.08 mL, 5 M, 2.0 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.45 (aromatic ABq, 4H), 5.28 (s, 1H), 2.77 (m, 2H), 2.54 (m, 2H), 2.45 (d, 2H), 1.90 (m, 1H), 1.5–1.7 (m, 4H), 0.95 (d, 6H), 0.88 (t, 3H), 0.87 (t, 3H).
Example 6
Step 1
The alpha-bromoester of the following step which is derived from the (S) enantiomer of pyrrolidine lactamide is known. See Tet Let, 37, 2683–2686, 1996. Synthesis is identical to the reported route, starting in this case from (R) isobutyl lactate. NMR (CDCl3) σ7.57 (m, 2H), 7.37 (m, 3H), 5.47 (s, 1H), 4.13 (q, 1H, J=7.1 Hz) 3.3–3.62 (m, 4H), 1.8–2.0 (m, 4H), 1.50 (d, 3H, J=6.7 Hz), 1.43 (d, 3H, J=6.8 Hz).
Step 2 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid (R)Pyrrolidinelactamide ester.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00062
The phenol (377 mg, 1.2 eq) was dissolved in THF (1.5 ml). Lithium tert-butoxide in THF (1 M solution, 1.2 ml, 1.0 eq) was added. The bromide (372 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in THF (6 ml) and cooled to −30 C. The solution of the lithium phenoxide was added dropwise to the solution of the bromide. The mixture was left at −20 C. 19 Hrs followed by slow warming to 0 C. over 3 Hrs. The mixture was quenched with 1 N HCl and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was separated and washed with water followed by brine. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give a oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel with toluene:hexanes:tert-butanol as eluent (48:48:4) to give the titled compound.
NMR (CDCl3) σ7.52 (brd m, 2H), 7.42 (m, 4H), 5.34 (s, 1H), 5.26 (q, 1H, J=6.8 Hz), 3.56 (m, 2H), 3.45 (m, 2H), 2.69 (m, 2H), 2.54 (m, 2H), 1.94 (p, 2H, J=6.6 Hz), 1.87 (p, 2H, J=6.6 Hz), 1.45–1.75 (m, H), 1.36 (d, 3H, J=6.6 Hz), 0.866 (t, 3H, J=7.2 Hz), 0.847 (t, 3H, J=7.2 Hz).
Step 2 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00063
The ester (466 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in methanol (15 ml). Aqueous lithum hydroxide (1.0 M, 1.71 ml, 2.0 eq) was diluted into aqueous hydrogen peroxide (30% nominal, 5 ml). The solution of LiOOH was added to the methanol solution of the ester at RT. After 1 Hr the mixture was quenched with 2 N HCl and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was separated and washed with water followed dilute aqueous sodium bisulfite and brine. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give a oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel with hexanes:ethyl acetate plus 2% acetic acid as eluent (95:5) to give the titled compound.
The enantiomeric excess of the final product was determined by HPLC using a ChiralCel OD-R analytical column with acetonitrile water 0.1% TFA as eluent.
Spectra are as were described for the racemic material of Example 1
Example 7
Step 1 Preparation of 2,4-dihydroxy-3-propyl-1′,1′,1′-trifluoroacetophenone
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00064
A solution of 2-propylresorcinol (5.0 grams) and trifluoroacetic anhydride (9.6 mL) in 1,2-dichloroethane (30.0 mL) was treated with aluminum chloride(4.38 grams). This mixture was stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was partitioned between methylene choride and water. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and filtered. The solvent was evaporated and the resulting solid was recrystalized using methylene chloride and cyclohexane (1:1) to give the titled compound.
NMR (CDCl3) δ7.59 (d, 1H), 6.24 (d, 1H), 5.92 (s, 1H), 2.63 (t, 2H), 1.74 (s, 1H), 1.58 (m, 2H), 0.98 (t, 3H).
Step 2 Preparation of 3-trifluoromethyl-7-propyl-6-hydroxy-1,2-benzisoxazole.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00065
A mixture of 2,4-dihydroxy-3-propyl-1′,1′,1′-trifluoroacetophenone(2.5 grams), sodium acetate (4.18 grams), hydroxylamine hydrochloride (3.59 grams) and methanol (80 mL) was refluxed overnight. The solvent was then evaporated and the resulting solid was partitioned between ethyl acetate and pH 7 buffer. The organic phase was separated and washed with brine. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give a oil. The oil was then dissolved in acetic anhydride. The solution was stirred for two hours, then the acetic anhydride was evaporated in vac. The residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate and pH 7 buffer and the organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate. The organic phase was evaporated to give an oil. This was dissolved in pyridine and refluxed overnight. The solvent was evaporated in vac to give an oil which was chromatographed on silica gel using ethyl acetate and hexane (1:4) to give the titled compound.
NMR (CDCl3) δ7.46 (d, 1H), 6.92 (d, 1H), 5.42 (bs, 1H), 2.89 (t, 2H), 1.74 (m, 2H), 0.98 (t, 3H).
Step 3 Preparation of 5-Chloro-6-hydroxy-7-propyl-3-trifluoromethyl-1,2-benzisoxazole.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00066
Diisobutylamine (0.8 ml, 0.10 eq) and 6-hydroxy-7-propyl-3-trifluoromethylbenzisoxazole (11 gm, 1.0 eq) were dissolved in toluene (275 ml) at room temperature. Slow addition of sulfuryl chloride (4.20 ml, 1.15 eq) results in a suspension which was stirred overnight. Additional diisobutylamine (total 1.6 ml, 0.4 eq) was added in four equal portions over 24 hr until no further starting benzisoxazole was detected by analytical TLC. The reaction mixture was poured into saturated sodium bisulfite (500 ml) and ethyl ether (700 ml). The phases were separated. The ether phase was washed with brine and dried over Na2SO4. The solvent was evaporated in vac to give an orange solid which was purified by chromatography on silica gel eluting with acetone:hexane (2:98) to give the title compound.
Step 4 Preparation of α-[[5-chloro-7-propyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetic acid (R)Pyrrolidinelactamide ester.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00067
To a solution of the phenol (1.0 eq) in THF (5 ml) was added a solution of lithium tert-butoxide in THF (1M, 3.74 ml, 0.95 eq). The phenoxide solution was added dropwise to a solution of the bromide (1.478 g, 1 eq) in THF (1 ml) at −78° C. The resulting solution was allowed to stand at approx. −20° C. for 72 Hrs. The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and quench with 1N HCl. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was separated and washed with brine. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate. The solvent was evaporated to give an oil. The crude oil was chromatographed on a silica gel column, eluting with toluene:hexane:tert-butanol (20:77:3) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3); δ7.68 (s, 1H), 7.45 (aromatic ABq, 4H, J=8.5 Hz, Δδ=44.0), 5.72 (s, 1H), 5.28 (q, 1H, J=6.8 Hz), 3.58 (m, 2H), 3.40 (m, 2H), 2.83 (m, 2H), 2.68 (m, 2H), 1.97 (m, 2H), 1.88 (m, 2H), 1.61–1.68 (m, 1H), 1.37–1.43 (m, 1H), 1.39 (d, 3H, J=6.6 Hz), 0.87 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz).
MS ESI 596.1 M+Na
Step 5 Preparation of α-[[5-chloro-7-propyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]chlorobenzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00068
The ester (1.1142 g, 1.0 eq) was hydrolyzed as was described for the ester of Example 6, Step 2. The resulting oil was chromatographed on a silica gel column, eluting with glacial acetic acid:ethyl acetate:hexane (3:8:89) to give the title compound as a white solid. The enantiomeric excess of this product was determined by HPLC using a ChiralCel OD-R analytical column with acetonitrile:water (55:45) containing 0.1% TFA as eluent.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3); δ7.45 (aromatic ABq, 4H, J=8.5 Hz, Δδ=22.9), 5.66 (s, 1H), 2.81 (m, 1H), 2.63 (m, 1H), 1.61–1.66 (m, 1H), 1.34–1.37 (m, 1H), 0.86 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz).
MS ESI 449.0 M+1
Example 8
Step 1 Preparation of 5-Chloro-3-ethyl-6-hydroxy-7-propyl-1,2-benzisoxazole
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00069
Commercially available 2,4-dihydroxy-3-propylpropiophenone was converted to the benzisoxazole as was described for example 1, step 3.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00070
Chlorination of the 3-ethyl-6-hydroxy-7-propyl-1,2-benzisoxazole was carried out as for Example 7, Step 3. The product was purified by recrystallization from hexanes.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3) d 7.49 (s, 1H), 5.97 (s, 1H), 2.94 (m, 4H), 1.75 (sex, 2H, J=7.6 Hz), 1.43 (t, 3H, J=7.5 Hz), 0.994 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz).
Step, 4 Preparation of α-[[5-chloro-3-ethyl-7-propyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid (R)Pyrrolidinelactamide ester.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00071
The title compound was prepared as was described for example 6, step 2. The phenol (1.46 g mg, 1.2 eq) was dissolved in THF (5.0 ml). Lithium tert-butoxide in THF (1 M solution, 5.57 ml, 1.0 eq) was added. The bromide (1.72 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in THF (10 ml) and cooled to −30° C. The solution of the lithium phenoxide was added dropwise to the solution of the bromide. The mixture was left at −20° C. for 19 Hrs followed by slow warming to 0° C. over 3 Hrs. The mixture was quenched with 1 N HCl and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was separated and washed with water followed by brine. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give a oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel with toluene:hexanes:tert-butanol as eluent (48:48:4) to give the titled compound.
NMR (CDCl3) σ7.52 (m, 3H), 7.41 (m, 2H), 5.66 (s, 1H), 5.33 (q, 1H, J=6.8), 3.33 to 3.65 (4 highly symmetric multiplets, 4H), 2.94 (q, 2H, J=7.6 Hz), 2.59 (ABX2 pattern, 2H), 1.94 (m, 2H), 1.87 (m, 2H), 1.61 (m, 1H), 1.43 (t, 3H, J=7.6 Hz 1.31 (d, 3H, J=6.9 Hz), 1.28 (m, 1H), 0.795 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz).
Step 5 Preparation of α-[[5-chloro-3-ethyl-7-propyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00072
The ester (452 mg, 1.0 eq) was hydrolyzed as was described for the ester of Example 6, Step 2. The resulting oil was chromatographed on a YMC RP8 HPLC column eluting with a linear water:acetonitrile (0.1% TFA) gradient, 90:10to 0:100 to give the titled compound as an oil.
The enantiomeric excess of the final product was determined by HPLC using a ChiralCel OD-R analytical column with 60:40 acetonitrile:water 0.1% TFA as eluent.
NMR (CDCl3) δ7.56 (s, 1H), 7.41–7.51 (m, 5H), 5.59 (s, 1H), 2.96 (q, 2H, J=7.6 Hz), 2.53 (ABX2 pattern, 2H), 1.58 (m, 1H), 1.44 (t, 3H, J=7.6 Hz), 1.22 (m, 1H), 0.779 (t, 3H, J=7.4 Hz).
Example 9
Step, 1 Preparation of 2,4-Dihydroxy-3-allylbenzophenone
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00073
Commercially available 4-allyloxy-2-hydroxybenzophenone (15 g) was rearranged by heating under reflux in ortho-dichlorobenzene (60 mL) for 26 hours. The product was isolated by dilution of the reaction mixture with 5 volumes hexanes to give a crystalline product as fine needles.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.62–7.59 (m, 2H), 7.56–7.52 (m, 2H), 7.49–7.44 (m, 2H), 7.40 (d, 1H, J=8.9 Hz), 6.34 (d, 1H, J=8.8 Hz), 6.02 (ddt, 1H, J=17.21, 10.1, 6.2 Hz), 5.72 (s, 1H, phenol OH), 5.14–5.24 (m, 2H), 3.53 (d with fine splitting, 2H, J=6.2 Hz).
Step 2 Preparation of 2,4-Dihydroxy-3-propylbenzophenone
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00074
A solution of 2,4-dihydroxy-3-(2-propenyl)benzophenone (3 g) was reduced under ˜1 atm H2 in ethyl acetate (100 mL) over 10% Pd/C catalyst (0.3 grams) for 3 hours. The product was purified by crystallization from methanol/water. The product is obtained as small yellow plates.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.61–7.59 (m, 2H), 7.55–7.51 (m, 1H), 7.48–7.44 (m, 2H), 7.33 (d, 1H, J=8.8 Hz), 6.29 (d, 1H, J=8.8 Hz), 5.51 (s, 1H, phenol OH), 2.66 (dd, 2H, J=7.6, 9.3 Hz), 1.61 (sext, 2H, J=7.7 Hz), 0.99 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz).
Step 3 Preparation of 6-hydroxy-7-propyl-3-phenyl-1,2-benzisoxazole
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00075
The 2,4-dihydroxy-3-propylbenzophenone (2.5 g, 1.0 Eq, 9.8 mmol) was converted to the oxime with NH2OH—HCl (2.7 g, 4.0 Eq, 39 mmol) and NaOAc (3.21 g, 4.0 Eq, 39 mmol) as in Example 1 Step 3. The oxime was purified by elution from a silica gel column (180 g E. Merck 40–63μ) with 97:3 Toluene:EtOAc. The product oxime (1.82 g) was further treated as in Example 1 Step 3 with acetic anhydride (15 ml) and subsequent reflux in pyridine (15 ml).
The cooled reaction mixture was poured into 2 N HCl and EtOAc. The aqueous phase was extracted with EtOAc and washed with sat'd aq NaHCO3, followed by sat'd aq NaCl. The EtOAc extracts were dried over Na2SO4 and reduced i. vac. The residue was taken up in refluxing toluene (50 ml). The product benzisoxazole is obtained as colorless crystals upon cooling to RT.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.92–7.89 (m, 2H), 7.57 (d, 1H, J=8.5 Hz), 7.55–7.49 (m, 3H), 6.86 (d, 1H, J=8.6 Hz), 5.14 (s, 1H, phenol OH), 2.90 (dd, 2H, J=8.9, 7.6 Hz), 1.76 (sext, 2H, J=7.5 Hz), 1.01 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz).
MS CI NH3 M+1 254.1
Step 4 Preparation of 5,7-dipropyl-6-hydroxy-3-phenyl-1,2-benzisoxazole.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00076
A heterogeneous mixture of 6-hydroxy-3-phenyl-7-propyl-1,2-benzisoxazole (12.6 g, 50 mmol), allyl bromide (12.1 g, 8.6 mL, 100 mmol) and K2CO3 (20.7 g, 150 mmol) in acetone (0.50 L) was vigorously stirred at 50° C. for 5 h. The reaction mixture was then filtered through a pad of silica gel and the filtrate was concentrated. The residue was azeotroped with toluene in vac. to give the allyl ether which was used without purification.
The allyl ether (14.7 g, 50 mmol) was dissolved in 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene (50 mL). The solution was heated under reflux for 6 h. After being cooled to room temperature, the reaction mixture was loaded onto a silica gel column and eluted first with hexane and then with ethyl acetate:hexane (1:9) to give the ortho allyl rearrangement product. The ortho allyl product (8.8 g, 30 mmol) was dissolved in toluene (250 mL). After addition of the catalyst Rh(PPh3)3Cl (1.38 g, 1.5 mmol), the homogeneous solution was stirred under H2 (1 atm) for 5 h. The solvent was evaporated and the residue was chromatographed on silica gel eluting with ethyl acetate:hexane (1:9) to give the title compound.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ7.50–7.26(m, 5H), 7.48(s, 1H), 5.20(s, 1H), 2.95(symm.m, 2H), 2.73(symm.m., 2H), 1.68–1.83(m, 4H), 1.03(t, J=7.0 Hz, 3H), 1.01(t, J=7.0 Hz, 3H).
MS(ESI): 294.1(M++1)
Step 5 Preparation of Methyl α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-phenyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00077
Methyl 2-bromo-2-phenylacetate (2.29 g 10.0 mmol), Cs2CO3 (3.25 g, 10.0 mmol) and the indicated benzisoxazole (3.09 g, 10.5 mmol) were combined in 50 ml DMF at room temperature. The mixture was stirred 19 h. The suspension was poured into water (250 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was separated and washed with water followed by brine. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give an oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using ethyl acetate:hexanes (15:85) to give the desired compound.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ7.30–7.95(m, 10H), 7.58(s, 1H), 5.41(s, 1H), 3.97(s, 3H), 2.62–2.80(m, 2H), 2.50–2.61(m., 2H), 1.50–1.71(m, 4H), 0.88(t, 7.1 Hz, 3H), 0.86(t, J=7.1 Hz, 3H).
Step 6 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-phenyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00078
The ester (4.00 g, 9.0 mmol) was dissolved in THF (200 ml). An aqueous solution of lithium hydroxide (2 N, 25 ml) was added. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 h and then acidified with 2 N hydrochloric acid to pH 2. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was washed with brine, dried and concentrated. The residue was chromatographed on silica gel eluting with ethyl acetate:hexane:acetic acid (1:1:0.01) to give the title compound as a white solid.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ7.29–7.95(m, 10H), 7.59(s, 1H), 5.29(s, 1H), 2.64–2.84(m, 2H), 2.52–2.63(m., 2H), 1.52–1.73(m, 4H), 0.89(t, 7.1Hz, 3H), 0.88(t, J=7.1 Hz, 3H).
MS(ESI): 430.2(M++1).
Example 10
Step, 1 Preparation of 5-Chloro-6-hydroxy-3-phenyl-7-propyl-1,2-benzisoxazole
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00079
The phenol of example 9 step 3 (0.25 g, 0.86 mmol) was chlorinated as for example 7, step 3. The product was purified by chromatography on silica gel eluting with ethyl acetate:hexane (10:90).
Characteristic 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ7.94(s, 1H), 7.90–7.93(m, 2H), 7.48–7.55(m, 3H), 5.99(s, 1H), 2.79(t, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 1.70–1.79(m., 2H), 1.02 (t, J=7.0 Hz, 3H)
MS(ESI): 288.1(M++1).
Step 2 Preparation of Methyl α-[[5-chloro-3-phenyl-7-propyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00080
The phenol of step 1(0.25 g, 0.86 mmol) was coupled with commercially available methyl 2-bromo-2-phenylacetate (0.20 g, 0.86 mmol) as was described for example 9, step 5. The product was purified by chromatography on silica gel eluting with ethyl acetate:hexane (10:90).
Characteristic 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ7.92(s, 1H), 7.40–7.95(m, 10H), 1H), 5.77(s, 1H), 3.97(s, 3H), 2.65–2.77(m, 1H), 2.48–2.57(m, 1H), 1.50–2.65(m, 1H),1.21–1.32(m, 1H), 0.81(t, J=7.1 Hz, 3H).
Step 3 Preparation of α-[[5-chloro-3-phenyl-7-propyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00081
The ester of example 10, step 2 (0.34 g, 0.77 mmol) was hydrolyzed under conditions similar to those described for example 1, step 5. The product was purified by preparative HPLC on a YMC-pack C8 column. CH3CN:H2O (10:90 to 100:0, 15 min gradient) containing 0.1% TFA as eluent.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CD3OD, 400 MHz): δ7.91(s, 1H), 7.41–7.95(m, 10H), 5.66(s, 1H), 2.65–2.77(m, 1H), 2.49–2.59(m., 1H), 1.57–1.64(m, 1H), 1.24–1.35(m, 1H), 0.83(t, 7.1 Hz, 3H).
MS(ESI): 422.1(M++1).
Example 11
Step 1. Preparation of methyl 2,4-dihydroxy-3,5-dipropylbenzoate
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00082
Commercially available 2,4-dihydroxybenzoic acid (25.2 g, 150 mmol) was allylated as was described for example 9, step 4, except that the molar equivalents of the allyl bromide and K2CO3 were doubled. The crude product obtained was used without purification.
The crude allylation product (37.2 g, 150 mmol) was dissolved in 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene (150 mL). The solution was heated under reflux for 7 h and then cooled to 25° C. The reaction mixture was loaded directly onto a silica gel column eluting first with hexane and then with hexane:ethyl acetate(1:9) to give the rearrangment product.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ11.2(s, 1H), 7.59 (s, 1H), 6.0(m, 2H), 5.95–6.05(m, 2H), 5.16–5.21(m, 4H), 3.95 (s, 3H), 3.52(br. d, J=7.6 Hz, 2d, J=7.7 Hz, 2H).
The bis-allyl product (31.5 g, 127 mmol) was dissolved in ethyl acetate (500 mL). 10% palladium on carbon (1.5 g) was added. The resulting solution was stirred under H2 (1 atm) for 16 h and filtered through a pad of silica gel. Concentration of the filtrate gave the title compound as a liquid.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): 11.0 (s, 1H), 7.60 (s, 1H), 3.96(s, 3H), 2.70(symm. m, 2H), 2.59(symm. m, 2H), 1.60–1.72(m, 4H), 1.05(t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.03(t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).
Step 2. Preparation of N-Alkyl-4-acetoxy-3,5-dipropyl-6-hydroxybenzohydroxamic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00083
Methyl 2,4-dihydroxy-3,5-dipropylbenzoate (31.6 g, 127 mmol) was dissovled in methanol (500 mL). An aqueous solution of NaOH (2 N, 380 mL, 0.762 mol) was added. After being stirred under reflux for 20 h. the reaction mixture was poured into brine (500 mL), acidified with 2 N HCl to pH 2 and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated. The residue was used without purification.
The crude acid (25.4 g, 108 mmol) and acetyl chloride (25.4 g, 23.0 mL, 324 mmol) were dissolved in methylene chloride (500 mL). Pyridine (34.1 g, 35.0 mL, 432 mmol) was added at 0° C. The reaction mixture was warmed to 25° C. over 1 h and then poured into 0.5 N hydrochloric acid (250 mL). The organic layer was separated and washed with brine. Removal of the solvent give the crude 2,4-diacetoxy-3,5-dipropylbenzoic acid.
The crude acid (4.1 g, 12.7 mmol) was suspended in oxalyl chloride (4.83 g, 3.12 mL, 38.1 mmol). After addition of 2 drops of DMF, the reaction mixture was heated at 60° C. for 1 h. Excess reagent was distilled off under reduced pressure and the residue was azeotroped with toluene (2×20 mL) to afford the crude acid chloride.
The crude acid chloride (1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in methylene chloride (4.0 mL/mmol) and the solution was added to a vigorously stirred biphasic mixture of the appropriate N-alkylhydroxyamine hydrochloride (3.0 equiv.) in diethyl ether (25 mL/mmol) and 2 N aqueous sodium carbonate (4.0 equiv.). After 30 min, the reaction mixture was acidified with 2 N HCl to pH 2 and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexane:ethyl acetate (8:2) to give the title compound (R=Me, i-Pr) as brown oil.
R=i-Pr
Characteristic 1H NMR(CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ7.02(s, 1H), 4.59(septet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 2.36–2.60(m, 4H), 2.38(s, 3H), 1.41–1.56(m, 4H), 1.39 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 0.98(t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 0.96(t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).
MS(ESI): 338 (M++1).
R=Me
Characteristic 1H NMR(CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ7.05, s, 1H), 3.59(s, 3H), 2.46–2.60(m, 2H), 2.30–2.41(m, 2H), 2.38(s, 3H), 1.41–1.56(m, 4H), 0.98(t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 0.96(t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).
MS(ESI): 310(M++1).
Step 3. 2,3-dihydro-6-hydroxy-2-methyl-3-oxo-5,7-dipropyl-1,2-benzisoxazole.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00084
The hydroxamic acid (0.31 g, 1.0 mmol) and triphenyl phosphine (0.39 g, 1.5 mmol) were dissolved in dry THF (10 mL). To the resulting solution was added dropwise diethyl azodicarboxylate (0.26 g, 1.5 mmol). The reaction was stirred at 25° C. for 30 min before it was quenched with methanol:acetic acid (1:1, 0.10 mL). The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was loaded onto a silica gel column. Elution with hexane:ethyl acetate (8:2) gave the acetylate title compound as an.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ7.55(s, 1H), 3.68(s, 3H), 2.40 (s, 3H), 2.80(t, J=7.1 Hz, 2H), 2.73(t, J=7.1 Hz, 2H).
The crude product (0.23 g, 0.80 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (5.0 mL). 2 N sodium hydroxide solution (1.0 mL) was added. After being stirred for 30 min, the reaction mixture was neutralized with 2N hydrochloric acid and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue was taken up in ethyl acetate and filtered through silica gel to give the title compound as a solid.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ7.43(s, 1H), 3.62(s, 3H), 2.77(t, J=7.1 Hz, 2H), 2.63(t, J=7.1 Hz, 2H).
MS(ESI): 250.1(M++1).
Step 4 Preparation of α-[(2,3-dihydro-2-methyl-3-oxo-5,7-dipropyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl)oxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00085
The phenol of step 3 (0.20 g, 0.80 mmol) was coupled with the indicated bromide (0.3 g, 0.80 mmol) as was described for example 6, step 1. The product was purified by chromatography on silica gel eluting with ethyl acetate:hexane (50:50).
Characteristic 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): δ7.45 (s, 1H), 7.40 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 2H), 7.25(d, J=6.7 Hz), 5.28 (s, 1H), 5.27 (q, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 3.62(s, 3H), 2.95(septet, J=7.2 Hz, 1H) 1.37(d, J=7.1 Hz, 3H), 1.24(d, J=7.2 Hz, 6H).
MS(ESI): 573.1(M+Na+).
The coupling product (0.42 g, 0.72 mmol) was hydrolyzed under conditions similar to those described for example 6, step 2. The product was purified by preparative HPLC on a YMC-pack C8 column with CH3CN:H2O (10:90 to 100:0, 15 min gradient) containing 0.1% TFA as eluent.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CD3OD, 500 MHz): δ7.45 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 2H), 7.43(s, 1H), 7.40 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 2H), 5.17(s, 1H), 3.62(s, 3H), 2.86(septet, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 1.24(d, J=7.2 Hz, 6H).
MS(ESI): 426.2(M++1)
Example 12
Step 1. Preparation of 2,3-dihydro-6-hydroxy-3-(1-methylethyl)-2-oxo-5,7-dipropyl-1,3-benzoxazole.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00086
The N-isopropylhydroxamic acid of example 11 step 2 (1.0 g, 3.0 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (30 mL). 2 N KOH solution was added (5 mL). After being stirred at 25° C. for 30 min the reaction mixture was acidified with 2 N hydrochloric acid to pH 2 and extracted with ethyl acetate (2×20 mL). The organic phase was washed with brine, dried and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexane-ethyl acetate (7:3) to give the deacetylated product as a brown oil.
The deacetylated product (0.74 g, 2.4 mmol) was mixed with triphenylphosphine (0.94 g, 3.6 mmol) in dry THF (20 mmol). Diethyl azodicarboxylate (0.63 g, 3.6 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min before it was quenched with methanol:acetic acid (1:1, 0.1 mL). The solvent was evaporated and the residue was subjected to chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexane:ethyl acetate (7:3) to give the title compound as an oil.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CD3OD, 500 MHz): δ6.82(s, 1H), 4.47(septet, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 1.50(d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H).
MS(ESI): 278.1 (M++1).
Step 2 Preparation of α-[(2,3-dihydro-3-(1-methylethyl)-2-oxo-5,7-dipropyl-1,3-benzoxazol-6-yl)oxy]4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00087
The phenol of step 1 (0.28 g, 1.0 mmol) was coupled with the indicated bromide(0.38 g, 1.0 mmol) as for example 6, step 1. The product was purified by chromatography on silica gel eluting with ethyl acetate:hexane (50:50).
Characteristic 1H NMR (CD3Cl3, 500 MHz): δ7.40(d, J=6.7, 2H), 7.22(d, J=6.7 Hz, 2H), 6.70(s, 1H), 5.25 (q, J=7.1 Hz, 1H), 5.15 (s, 1H), 4.50(septet, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 2.95(septet, J=7.2 Hz, 1H) 1.52(d, J=7.0 Hz, 6H), 1.37(d, J=7.1 Hz, 3H), 1.23(d, J=7.2 Hz, 6H).
MS(ESI): 578.2(M++1)
The coupling product (0.50 g, 0.88 mmol) was hydrolyzed under conditions similar to those described for example 6, step 2. The product was purified by preparative HPLC on a YMC-pack C8 column CH3CN:H2O (10:90 to 100:0, 15 min gradient) containing 0.1% TFA as eluent.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CD3OD, 500 MHz): δ7.40 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 2H), 7.28(d, J=6.7 Hz, 2H), 6.92 (s, 1H), 5.05(s, 1H), 4.50(septet, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 2.95(septet, J=7.2 Hz, 1H), 1.50(d, J=7.0 Hz, 6H), 1.25(d, J=7.2 Hz, 6H)
MS(ESI): 453.1 (M++1)
Example 13
Step 1 Preparation of 2,4-Dihydroxy-3,5-dipropylpropiophenone.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00088
The 2,6-bis-allylresorcinol (5.0 gm, 1.0 Eq) was dissolved in trifluoromethanesulfonic acid (25 ml) with sodium propionate (2.96 gm, 1.2 Eq). The mixture was heated to 85° C. for 1½ Hrs and then cooled to RT. The mixture was diluted with H2O and ethyl acetate. The phases were separated and the aqueous phase extracted again with EtOAc. The EtOAc extracts were washed with saturated aq NaCl, dried over MgSO4 and reduced i. vac.
The product was purified by elution from a silica gel column (200 g E. Merck 40–63μ) with hexanes:EtOAc 96:4.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.40 (s, 1H), 5.29 (s, 1H), 2.98 (q, 2H, J=7.4 Hz), 2.64 (dd, 2H, J=6.3, 7.7 Hz), 2.55 (collapsed dd, 2H, J obscured), 1.6 (m, 4H), 1.25 (t, 3H, J=7.4 Hz), 1.003 (t, 3H, J=7.4 Hz), 0.999 (t, 3H, J=7.4 Hz).
Step 2 Preparation of Methyl α-[3-hydroxy-4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]benzeneacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00089
The phenol of step 1 (12 gm, 1.0 Eq) was coupled with commercially available methyl 2-bromo-2-phenylacetate (11.5 gm, 1.05 Eq) as for example 1, step 4. The product was purified by elution from a silica gel column (700 g E. Merck 40–63μ) with hexanes:EtOAc 96:4.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.51–7.53 (m, 2H), 7.42 (m, 3H), 5.24 (s, 1H), 3.77 (s, 3H), 2.99 (q, 2H, J=7.3 Hz), 2.48 (m, 2H), 2.36 (m, 2H), 1.53 (m, 4H), 1.24 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz), 0.848 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz), 0.835 (t, 3H), J=7.3 Hz).
Step 4 Preparation of α-[3-hydroxy-4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]benzeneacetic acid
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00090
The ester of step 2 (18.6 gm) was hydrolyzed with NaOH (98 ml) as for example 1, step 5.
The product was purified by elution from a silica gel column (700 g E. Merck 40–63μ) with hexanes:EtOAc:AcOH 88:10:2. The resulting oil was crystallized from hexanes to give the titled compound.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.50 (m, 2H), 7.42 (m, 3H), 5.26 (s, 1H), 2.99 (q, 2H, J=7.3 Hz), 2.45 (m, 2H), 2.32 (m, 2H), 1.45 (m, 4H), 1.24 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz), 0.824 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz), 0.814 (t, 3H, J=7.2 Hz).
Example 14
Step 1 Preparation of 2,6-dipropyl-4-propionylphenol
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00091
Sodium propanoate (0.88 g, 1.5 eq) and 2,6-dipropylphenol (1.09 g, 1.0 eq) were combined in Triflic Acid (5.0 g) as in Example 13, step 1. The resulting waxy solid was purified by chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate:hexanes:acetic acid (10:90:1) to give the titled phenol.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 7.66 (s, 2H), 5.19 (s, 1H, phenol OH), 2.96 (q, 2H, J=7.3), 2.62 (t, 4H, J=7.7 Hz), 1.68 (m, 4H), 1.22 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz), 1.01 (t, 6H, J=7.3 Hz)
MS (ESI): (M+H)=235.1.
Step 2 Preparation of Methyl α-[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]benzeneacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00092
Methyl 2-bromo-2-phenylacetate (0.95 eq), Cs2CO3 (1.20 eq) and the indicated phenol (1.0 eq) were combined in 1.5 ml DMF at 50° C. The mixture was stirred for 1.5 Hrs. The suspension was then cooled and poured into 10% citric acid solution and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was separated and washed with water followed by brine. The organic phase was then dried over magnesium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated i. vac. to give an oil. The resulting oil was purified by chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate:hexanes (10:90) to give the titled compound.
Step 3 Preparation of racemic α-[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]benzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00093
The title acid was prepared as for example 1, step 5 from the indicated ester (30.0 mg, 1.0 eq) and 2 N KOH (1.1 eq). After work-up, the resulting oil was purified by chromatography on a Zorbax C8 RP (21.2×250 mm) HPLC column eluting with 70:30 water:acetonitrile (0.1% TFA) to give the titled compound as an oil.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CD3OD); 7.65 (s, 2H), 7.49 (m, 2H), 7.40 (m, 3H) 5.18 (s, 1H) 2.99 (q, 2H, J=7.3 Hz), 2.44 (m, 4H), 1.51 (m, 4H) 1.15 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz) 0.83 (t, 6H, J=7.3 Hz).
MS (ESI): (M+H)=369.1, (M+Na)=391.1
Example 15
Step 1 Preparation of Methyl 2-Bromo-2(4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl)acetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00094
Commercially available 4-isopropylphenylacetic acid (1 gram) was dissolved in ether (20 mL). Diazomethane was added until the reaction mixture remained yellow. The crude reaction mixture was cooled to −78° C. in THF (50 mL). Lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide (7.05 mL, 1.1 eq) was added to the reaction and stirred for 20 minutes. Chlorotrimethylsilane (1.52 mL, 1.875 eq) was added at −78° C. and stirred for 20 minutes. N-bromosuccinimide (1.20 g, 1.05 eq) was added to the reaction mixture. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir and warm to room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with H2O. The aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give yellow oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using hexanes and ethyl acetate (95:5) to give methyl 2-bromo-2-(4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl)acetate.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 7.46–7.56 (m, 2H), 7.22–7.26 (m, 2H), 5.39 (s, 1H), 3.80 (s, 3H), 2.93 (m, 1H), 1.26 (d, 6H)
The methyl ester (0.052 moles) and 1 N LiOH (0.053 moles) was stirred at 0° C. for 1H. The reaction was then acidified with 2 N HCl (pH=2) and partitioned between ethyl acetate/water. The organic phase was separated and washed with water followed by brine. The organic phase was then dried over magnesium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated i. vac. to give an oil which became crystalline i. vac. The α-bromo acid was used in the following condensation without purification.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CD3OD); 7.46 (d, 2H, J=8.0 Hz), 7.23 (d, 2H, J=8.3 Hz) 5.48 (s, 1H) 2.90 (m, 1H) 1.24 (d, 6H, J=6.9 Hz)
Step 2 Preparation of 2-Bromo-2-(4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl)acetate (R)Pyrrolidinelactamide ester.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00095
The acid from step 1 (0.053 moles) was treated with DCC (1.1 equiv., 1.0M in dichloromethane) and DMAP (0.05 equiv.) in dry dichloromethane at 0° C. as described in Tet Let 37, 2683–2686, 1996 and references cited therein. After work-up, the reaction mixture was purified on silica gel using ethyl acetate:hexanes:acetic acid (30:70:1) as eluent. The product is an approximately one to one mixture of diastereomers.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CD3OD); 7.48 (d, 0.5×2H, J=8.2 Hz), 7.47 (d, 0.5×2H, J=8.3 Hz), 7.24 (d, 0.5×2H, J=8.2 Hz), 7.23 (d, 0.5×2H, J=8.3 Hz), 5.64 (s, 0.5×1H), 5.62 (s, 0.5×1H) 5.26 (m, 1H), 3.32–3.64 (m, 4H), 2.90 (m, 1H) 1.82–2.02 (m, 4H), 1.44 (d, 0.5×3H, J=6.6 Hz), 1.38 (d, 0.5×3H, J=6.6 Hz), 1.24 (d, 6H, J=6.9 Hz)
MS (ESI): (M+Na)=558.3
Alternate Preparation of Pyrrolidine-lactamide Ester of α-Bromo-(p-(isdpropylphenyl)acetic Acid
Step 1a. Preparation of (R) Pyrrolidine Lactamide
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00096
A mixture of commercially available (R)-(+)-isobutyl lactate (25 mL, 166 mmol) and pyrrolidine (23.61 g, 27.7 mL, 332 mmol) were kept at 25° C. for 3 days. The reaction mixture was evaporated i. vac. The residued was azeotroped with toluene (2×100 mL) to give title compound as a brown liquid.
Step 2a Preparation of 2-oxo-2-(4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl)acetic (R)Pyrrolidinelactamide ester.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00097
At 25° C., aluminum trichloride (26.7 g, 0.20 mmol) was added to a solution of isopropylbenzene (24.0 g, 0.20 mole) and ethyl chlorooxoacetate (41.0 g, 0.30 mol) in dry methylene chloride (0.50 L). The resulting mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 2 h and then poured into 0.5 N hydrochloric acid (0.50 L). The organic layer was separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with methylene chloride (2×200 mL). The combined organic layers were washed successively with brine (1×300 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate (1×300 mL) and dried over MgSO4. Removal of all volatiles i. vac. gave the α-keto ester, which was used without purification. The crude keto ester (25.0 g, 114 mmol) was dissolved in methanol (0.50 L). 2 N sodium hydroxide (83.0 mL) solution was added. After being stirred for 30 min., the reaction mixture was diluted with water (0.50 L), acidified with 2 N hydrochloric acid to pH 2 and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×250 mL). The extracts were washed with brine (2×250 mL), dried over MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude keto acid (23.0 g) was used without purification.
The crude keto acid (4.6. g, 22.8 mmol) was dissolved in dry methylene chloride (20 mL). Oxalyl chloride (5.78 g, 4.0 mL, 45.6 mmol) was added followed by addition of 1 drop of dimethylformamide. The reaction mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 30 min and heated under reflux for another 30 min. After all volatiles were distilled off, the residue was azeotroped with toluene (1×100 mL) under reduced presure to give the crude acid chloride.
The crude acid chloride (ca. 4.6 g, 21.8 mmol) was mixed with pyrrolidine (R)-lactamide (3.12 g, 21.8 mmol) in dry methylene chloride (100 mL). The resulting solution was cooled to 0° C., and triethylamine (4.4 g, 6.06 mL, 43.6 mmol) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was left stirring at 25 C for 30 min and then poured into 0.5 N hydrochloric acid (50 mL). The organic layer was separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with methylene chloride (2×50 mL). The combined organic phases were washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated. The residue was subjected to chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexane:ethyl acetate (1:1) to give pure title compound as a solid.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz) δ8.1 (d, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 7.31(d, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 5.39 (q, J=7.0 Hz, 1H), 3.20 (m, 1H), 1.60 (d, J=7.0 Hz. 3H), 1.26 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 6 h)
Step 3a. Preparation of 2-Bromo-2-(4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl)acetate (R)Pyrrolidinelactamide ester.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00098
To a solution of the lactamide keto ester (5.08 g, 16.0 mmol) in dry THF (100 mL) cooled at 0° C. was added sodium borohydride (0.302 g, 8.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 30 min and then poured into a cold mixture of brine (50 mL) and 2 N hydrochloric acid (4 mL). The organic layer was separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×50 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (1×50 mL), dried and concentrated. The residue (ca 4.6 g) was used directly for the next step.
The crude product (ca. 4.6 g, 14.5 mmol) was dissolved in dry methylene chloride (50 mL) at 25° C. Phosphorus tribromide (3.92 g, 1.37 mL, 14.5 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 30 min and then poured into brine (100 mL). The organic phase was separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with methylene chloride (2×50 mL). The combined organic phases were washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexane:ethyl acetate (1:1) to give the title compound as a 1:1 mixture of diastereoisomers.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CDCl3, 500 MHz): δ5.42 (s, 1H), 5.29 (q, J=7.0 Hz, 0.5×1H), 5.27 (q, J=7.0 Hz, 0.5×1H), 2.9 (m, 1H), 1.50 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 0.5×3H), 1.45 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 0.5×3H), 1.25 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 0.5×6H), 1.24 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 0.5×6H).
Step 3 Preparation of α-[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]benzeneacetic acid (R)Pyrrolidinelactamide ester.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00099
The bromide described immediately above (0.045 moles) and 1.05 equiv. of the phenol from Example 14 Step 1 were combined as in Example 6 Step 1. After work-up, the reaction mixture was purified by chromatography on silica gel using acetone:hexanes (20:80) as eluent to give the titled compound.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CD3OD); 7.64 (s, 2H), 7.39 (d, 2H, J=8.0 Hz), 7.28 (d, 2H, J=8.1 Hz), 5.32 (s, 1H), 5.27 (q, 1H, J=6.9 Hz), 3.72 (m, 1H), 3.61 (m, 1H), 3.35–3.50 (m, 4H), 2.98 (q, 2H, J=7.2 Hz), 2.93 (m, 1H), 2.41 (m, 4H), 1.93 (m, 2H), 1.86 (m, 3H), 1.53 (m, 2H), 1.42 (m, 2H), 1.32 (d, 3H, J=6.9 Hz), 1.25 (d, 6H, J=6.9 Hz), 1.15 (t, 3H, J=7.3 Hz), 0.80 (t, 6H, J=7.3 Hz).
Step 4 Preparation of 2-(2,6-dipropyl-4-propionylphenoxy)-2-phenylacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00100
The ester from step 3 (0.033 moles) was treated with 2.1 equiv. 1 N LiOH pre-mixed with 30% hydrogen peroxide (51.0 ml.) and added at 0° C. as per Example 6 Step 2. After work-up, the reaction mixture was purified by chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate:hexanes:acetic acid (30:70:1) as eluent to give the titled acid. Enantiomeric purity was determined by HPLC using a Cyclobond 2000 column (4.6×250 mm) and a solvent system of methanol:acetonitrile:acetic acid (20:80:1) at a flow rate of 1.5 ml/min.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CD3OD); 7.64 (s, 2H), 7.38 (d, 2H, J=8.2 Hz), 7.27 (d, 2H, J=8.2 Hz), 5.13 (s, 1H), 2.99 (q, 2H, J=7.2), 2.92 (m, 1H), 2.42 (m, 4H), 1.53 (m, 2H), 1.43 (m, 2H), 1.26 (d, 6H, J=6.8 Hz), 1.15 (t, 3H, J=7.2 Hz), 0.82 (t, 6H, J=7.3 Hz).
MS (ESI): (M+H)=411.2, (M+Na)=433.3
Example 16
Step 1 Preparation of Methyl 2-Bromo-2-(4-(1-methylethoxy)phenyl)acetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00101
Methyl (4-hydroxyphenyl)acetate (1.0 g, 1.0 eq), Cs2CO3 (2.15 g, 1.1 eq) and 2-bromopropane (0.565 mL. 1.0 eq) were combined in 100 ml DMF at room temperature. The mixture was stirred overnight. The suspension was poured into 50 mL 1 N HCl and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was separated and washed with water followed by sodium bicarbonate. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give an oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using hexanes and ethyl acetate (95:5) to give methyl (4-(1-methylethoxy)phenyl)acetate.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 6.84 (d, 2H), 7.21 (d, 2H), 5.58 (m 1H), 3.65 (s, 3H), 3.59(s, 2H), 2.36(d, 6H)
Step 2 Preparation of Methyl α-[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-4-(1-methylethoxy)benzeneacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00102
The bromide (0.094 mmoles) described in step 1, Cs2CO3 (1.20 eq) and the phenol from Example 14 step 1 (1.0 eq) were combined in 1.5 ml DMF at 50° C. The mixture was stirred for 1.5 Hrs. The suspension was then cooled and poured into aqueous 10% citric acid solution and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was separated and washed with water followed by brine. The organic phase was then dried over magnesium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give an oil. This crude ester was then used in the following hydrolysis without purification.
Step 3 Preparation of α-[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-4-(1-methylethoxy)benzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00103
The title acid was prepared as for example 1, step 5 from the indicated ester (60.0 mg, 1.0 eq) and 2 N LiOH (1.1 eq) in 1:1 THF:methanol. After work-up, the resulting oil was purified by chromatography on a Zorbax C8 RP (21.2×250 mm) HPLC column eluting with 70:30 water:acetonitrile (0.1% TFA) to give the titled compound
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CD3OD); 7.64 (s, 2H), 7.35 (d, 2H, J=8.7 Hz), 6.91 (d, 2H, J=8.7 Hz), 5.10 (s, 1H), 2.99 (q, 2H, J=7.2), 2.43 (t, 4H, J=8.0), 1.55 (m, 2H), 1.47 (m, 2H), 1.31 (d, 6H, J=6.0 Hz), 1.15 (t, 3H, J=7.2 Hz), 0.84 (t, 6H, J=7.3 Hz).
MS (ESI): (M+Na)=449.1
Example 17
Step 1 Preparation of 3-Fluoro-2,6-dipropyl-4-propionylphenol
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00104
Commercially available 3-fluorophenol(11.2 g, 100 mmol) was subjected twice to the reaction sequence described in Example 11, step 1. The product, 3-fluoro-2,4-dipropylphenol, was purified by chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate:hexane(10:90) as eluent.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ6.92 (dd, J=8.2, 6.4 Hz, 1H), 6.59(dd, J=8.2, 8.3 Hz, 1H), 4.79(s, 1H), 2.62(td, J=7.1, 1.5 Hz, 2H), 2.55(t, J=7.1 Hz, 2H), 1.69–1.80(m, 4H), 0.99(t, J=7.2 Hz, 6H).
Propionic acid (9.07 g, 123 mmol) and 3-fluoro-2,4-dipropylphenol (9.60 g, 49.0 mmol) were mixed in trifluoromethanesulfonic acid (50 mL) as in Example 13, step 1. Purification by chramotography on silica gel using ethyl acetate:hexane (10:90) gave the title compound as a white solid.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CDCl3, 400 MHz): δ7.41 (dd, J=8.2, 6.4 Hz, 1H), 6.59 (dd, J=8.2, 8.3 Hz, 1H), 4.97(s, 1H), 2.98(q, J=7.1 Hz, 2H), 2.62(dt, J=7.1, 1.5 Hz, 2H), 2.55 (t, J=7.1 Hz, 2H), 1.69–1.80 (m, 4H), 1.22 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 3H), 0.99 (t, 6H, J=7.3 Hz)
MS (ESI): (M++H)=253.1
Step 2 Preparation of α-[3-fluoro-4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-4(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00105
The indicated fluorophenol (0.252, 1.00 mmol) and the indicated bromide (0.382 g, 1.00 mmol) were coupled as was described for example 6, step 1. The coupling product was hydrolysed under conditions similar to those described for example 6, step 2. The crude product was purified by HPLC on a YMC-pack C8 column with CH3CN:H2O (10:90 to 100:0, 15 min gradient) containing 0.1% TFA as eluent.
Characteristic 1H NMR (CD3OD, 500 MHz ): δ7.58 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.41(d, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.24(d, J=7.6 Hz, 2H), 5.17(s, 1H), 2.99(q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.32–2.45 (m, 4H), 1.43–1.57(m, 2H), 1.33–1.47(m, 2H), 1.26 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H), 1.15(t, J=7.3 Hz, 3H), 0.82 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 6H)
MS (ESI): 429.2(M++1).
Example 18
Step 1 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetamide.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00106
Dimethylaluminum amide was prepared by adding anhydrous toluene (10.6 ml) to ammonium chloride (0.5 g, 1 eq). The mixture was cooled to 0° C. and trimethylaluminum in toluene (2.0 M solution, 9.4 ml, 1 eq) was added dropwise. The reaction was allowed to stir at 0° C. for 15 min before warming to room temperature and stirring for an additional 1.5 h.
The indicated ester (0.5 g, 1 eq) was dissolved in toluene and freshly prepared 0.47 M dimethylaluminum amide (5 ml, 2 eq) was added. The reaction was then warmed to 100 C and allowed to stir for approximately 12 Hrs. The reaction was then cooled to room temperature and Na2SO4.10 H2O was added and stirred for an additional hour. Filtration followed by concentration of the solvent gave a yellow liquid. This was chromatographed on silica gel using hexanes:ethyl acetate (90:10) to (1:1) to give the amide.
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.23–7.36 (m, 6H), 7.03 (s, 1H), 6.37 (s, 1H), 5.11 (s, 1H), 2.47–2.54 (m, 2H), 2.33–2.39 (m, 2H), 1.55–1.62 (m, 2H), 1.39–1.46 (m, 2H), 0.81–0.86 (m, 6H)
Step 2 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetonitrile.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00107
The indicated amide (0.24 g, 1 eq) was diluted with methylene chloride (5 ml) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.312 g, 2.5 eq) was then added. The resulting mixture was stirred for 10 hours. The reaction mixture was then pipetted onto a silica gel column and eluted using hexane and ethyl acetate (20:1). The nitrile was obtained.
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.24–7.60 (m, 6H), 5.57 (s, 1H), 2.94–2.98 (m, 1H), 2.73–2.88 (m, 2H), 2.61–2.68 (m, 1H), 1.62–1.79 (m, 4H), 0.89–0.94 (m, 6H)
MS ESI M+1 403.2
Step 3 Preparation of 6-[phenyl(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00108
The indicated nitrile (0.13 g, 1 eq) was dissolve in anhydrous THF (5 ml). Trimethyltin azide (0.080 g, 1.2 eq) was then added. The reaction mixture was warmed to reflux and allowed to reflux for 12 hours. The solution was then cooled to room temperature. 0.5 N HCl was then added and the reaction was poured into a separatory funnel. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was washed with ethyl acetate two more times. The combined organic fractions were dried with sodium sulfate and then concentrated. The crude mixture was chromatographed with hexanes:ethyl acetate under a gradient from 90:10 to 1:1 w/1% acetic acid to give a relatively pure tetrazole which was then purified further by HPLC on a YMC-pack C18 column CH3CN:H2O (30:90 to 100:0, 16 min gradient) containing 0.1% TFA as eluent.
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CD3OD): 7.44–7.52 (m, 6H), 6.37 (s, 1H), 2.50–2.56 (m, 2H), 2.33–2.41 (m, 2H) 1.48–1.55 (m, 4H), 0.74–0.80 (m, 6H)
MS ESI M+1 446.2
Example 19
Step 1 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetamide.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00109
The title amide was prepared as was described for example 18, step 1 from the indicated ester (0.24 g, 1 eq) and Me2AlNH2 (0.89M, 1.15 ml, 2 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.18–7.37 (m, 5H), 7.04(s, 1H), 6.20 (s, 1H), 5.09 (s, 1H), 2.51–2.58 (m, 2H), 2.33–2.40 (m, 2H), 1.57–1.65 (m, 2H), 1.42–1.48 (m, 2H), 0.84–0.90 (m, 6H)
Step 2 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetonitrile.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00110
The title nitrile was prepared as was described for example 18, step 2 from the indicated amide (0.088 g, 1.0 eq) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.115 g, 2.5 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.48–7.55 (m, 5H), 5.56 (s, 1H), 2.96–3.02 (m, 1H), 2.73–2.89 (m, 2H), 2.60–2.68 (m, 1H), 1.60–1.83 (m, 4H) 0.90–0.95 (m, 6H)
MS ESI M+1 437.1
Step 3. Preparation of 6-[(4-chlorophenyl)(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl-1,2-benzisoxazole.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00111
The title tetrazole was prepared as was described for example 18, step 3 from the indicated nitrile (0.1 g, 1.0 eq) and Me3SnN3 (0.057 g, 1.2 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CD3OD): 7.46–7.54 (m, 5H), 6.40 (s, 1H), 2.50–2.62 (m, 2H), 2.31–2.42 (m, 2H), 1.46–1.60 (m, 4H), 0.75–0.82 (m, 6H)
MS ESI M+1 480.1
Example 20
Step 1 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetamide.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00112
The title amide was prepared as was described for example 18, step 1 from the indicated ester (1.0, 1 eq) and Me2AlNH2 (0.38M, 10.3 ml, 2 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.36 (s, 1H), 7.13–7.18 (m, 4H), 7.05 (s, 1H), 5.60 (s, 1H), 5.08 (s, 1H), 2.83–2.87 (m, 1H), 2.33–2.52 (m, 4H), 1.24–1.62 (m, 4H), 1.17–1.23 (m, 6H), 0.77–0.84 (m, 6H)
Step 2 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetonitrile.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00113
The title nitrile was prepared as for example 18, step 2 from the indicated amide (0.58 g, 1.0 eq) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.747 g, 2.5 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.49 (d, J=10.1 Hz, 2H), 7.47 (s, 1H), 7.35(d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H), 5.53 (s, 1H), 2.93–3.02 (m, 2H), 2.7–2.88 (m, 2H), 2.62–2.68 (m, 1H), 1.61–1.84 (m, 4H), 1.27 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 6H), 0.91–0.95(m, 6H)
MS ESI M+1 445.2
Step 3 Preparation of 6-[[4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl](1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00114
The title tetrazole was prepared as was described for example 18, step 3 from the indicated nitrile (0.56 g, 1.0 eq) and Me3SnN3 (0.311 g, 1.2 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CD3OD): 7.49 (s, 1H), 7.35 (dd, J=8.4, 24.4 Hz, 4H), 6.32 (s, 1H), 2.90–2.98 (m, 1H), 2.50–2.55 (m, 2H), 2.30–2.44 (m, 2H), 1.36–1.60 (m, 4H), 1.25 (d, J=7.2 Hz, 6H), 0.76 (dd, J=7.2, 16.0 Hz, 6H)
MS ESI M+Na 510.2
Example 21
Step 1 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-(trifluoromethyl)benzeneacetamide.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00115
The title amide was prepared as was described for example 18, step 1 from the indicated ester (0.70 g, 1 eq) and Me2AlNH2 (0.93M, 3.0 ml, 2 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.61(d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.42 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.38 (s, 1H), 7.06 (s, 1H), 6.06 (s, 1H), 5.16 (s, 1H), 2.48–2.62 (m, 2H), 2.30–2.44 (m, 2H), 1.52–1.68 (m, 2H), 1.34–1.48 (m, 2H), 0.81–0.88 (m, 6H)
Step 2 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-(trifluoromethyl)benzeneacetonitrile.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00116
The title nitrile was prepared as for example 18, step 2 from the indicated amide (0.2383 g, 1.0 eq) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.3 g, 2.5 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.78 (dd, J=8.5, 21.3 Hz, 4H), 7.50 (s, 1H), 5.67 (s, 1H), 2.97–3.03 (m, 1H), 2.84–2.90 (m, 1H), 2.75–2.81 (m, 1H), 2.62–2.68 (m, 1H), 1.62–1.84 (m, 4H), 0.92 (dd, J=7.5, 15.3 Hz, 6H)
MS ESI M+1 471.3
Step 3 Preparation of 6-[(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00117
The title tetrazole was prepared as was described for example 18, step 3 from the indicated nitrile (0.2 g, 1.0 eq) and Me3SnN3 (0.105 g, 1.2 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CD3OD): 7.79 (s, 4H), 7.52 (s, 1H), 6.52 (s, 1H), 2.52–2.58 (m, 2H), 2.35–2.39 (m, 2H), 1.46–1.56 (m, 4H), 0.74–0.80 (m, 6H)
MS ESI M+1 514.2
Example 22
Step 1 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]4-(2-methylpropyl)benzeneacetamide.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00118
The title amide was prepared as was described for example 18, step 1 from the indicated ester (0.73 g, 1 eq) and Me2AlNH2 (0.39M, 7.6 ml, 2 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.35 (d, J=3.9 Hz, 1H), 7.08–7.14 (m, 4H), 7.05 (s, 1H), 6.14 (s, 1H), 5.09 (s, 1H), 2.33–2.53 (m, 6H), 1.78–1.85 (m, 1H), 1.55–1.62 (m, 2H), 1.38–1.50 (m, 2H), 0.82–0.88 (m, 12H)
Step 2 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-(2-methylpropyl)benzeneacetonitrile.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00119
The title nitrile was prepared as was described for example 18, step 2 from the indicated amide (0.33 g, 1.0 eq) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.412 g, 2.5 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.47–7.49 (m, 3H), 7.27 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 5.53 (s, 1H), 2.93–2.99(m, 1H), 2.73–2.87 (m, 2H), 2.61–2.69 (m, 1H), 2.54 (d, J=7.0 Hz, 2H), 1.86–1.94 (m, 1H), 1.55–1.79 (m, 4H), 0.85–0.96 (m, 12H)
MS ESI M+1
Step 3 Preparation of 6-[[4-(2-methylpropyl)phenyl](1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00120
The title tetrazole was prepared as for example 18, step 3from the indicated nitrile (0.3 g, 1.0 eq) and Me3SnN3 (0.162 g, 1.2 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CD3OD): 7.49 (s, 1H), 7.29 (dd, J=8.4, 48.4 Hz, 4H), 6.32 (s, 1H), 2.49–2.54 (m, 4H), 2.33–2.40 (m, 2H), 1.84–1.91 (m, 1H), 1.47–1.54 (m, 4H), 0.090 (dd, J=1.2, 6.7 Hz, 6H), 0.74–0.80 (m, 6H)
MS ESI M+1
Example 23
Step 1 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-ethylbenzeneacetamide.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00121
The title amide was prepared as was described for example 18, step 1 from the indicated ester (0.15 g, 1 eq) and Me2AlNH2 (0.39M, 1.7 ml, 2 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.36 (s, 1H), 7.14 (s, 4H), 7.05 (s, 1H), 5.92 (s, 1H), 5.09 (s, 1H), 2.61 (dd, J=7.7, 15.3 Hz, 2H), 2.47–2.55 (m, 2H), 2.34–2.41 (m, 2H), 1.31–1.68 (m, 4H), 1.22–1.28 (m, 3H), 0.81–0.88 (m, 6H)
Step 2 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-ethylbenzeneacetonitrile.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00122
The title nitrile was prepared as was described for example 18, step 2 from the indicated amide (0.08 g, 1.0 eq) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.106 g, 2.5 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.49 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.47 (s, 1H), 7.32 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 5.54 (s, 1H), 2.93–3.2 (m, 1H), 2.62–2.90 (m, 5H), 1.61–1.82 (m, 4H), 1.26 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H), 0.90–0.95 (m, 6H)
Step 3 Preparation of 6-[(4-ethylphenyl)(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00123
The title tetrazole was prepared as was described for example 18, step 3 from the indicated nitrile (0.075 g, 1.0 eq) and Me3SnN3 (0.054 g, 1.2 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CD3OD): 7.49 (s, 1H), 7.37 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.28 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.32 (s, 1H), 2.65 (dd, J=7.6, 15.2 Hz, 2H), 2.50–2.55 (m, 2H), 2.33–2.40 (m, 2H), 1.41–1.59 (m, 4H), 1.23 (t, J=7.6 Hz, 3H), 0.73–0.79 (m, 6H)
MS ESI M+Na 524.2
Example 24
Step 1 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-phenyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetamide.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00124
The title amide was prepared as was described for example 18, step 1 from the indicated ester (0.12 g, 1 eq) and Me2AlNH2 (0.57M, 0.95 ml, 2 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.89–7.90 (m, 2H), 7.51–7.55 (m, 3H), 7.13–7.47 (m, 6H), 7.13 (s, 1H), 6.06(s, 1H), 5.15 (s, 1H), 2.50–2.58 (m, 2H), 2.34–2.40 (m, 2H), 1.62–1.74 (m, 2H), 1.44–1.48 (m, 2H), 1.23–1.26 (m, 3H), 0.84–0.89 (m, 3H)
Step 2 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-phenyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetonitrile.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00125
The title nitrile was prepared as was described for example 18, step 2 from the indicated amide (0.06 g, 1.0 eq) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.083 g, 2.5 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.94–7.97 (m, 2H), 7.54–7.66 (m, 9H), 5.63 (s, 1H), 2.66–3.06 (m, 4H), 1.68–1.91 (m, 4H), 1.01–1.32 (m, 3H), 0.87–0.99 (m, 3H).
MS ESI M+1 411.3
Step 3 Preparation of 6-[(phenyl)(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-phenyl-1,2-benzisoxazole.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00126
The title tetrazole was prepared as was described for example 18, step 3 from the indicated nitrile (0.057 g, 1.0 eq) and Me3SnN3 (0.034 g, 1.2 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CD3OD): 7.91–9.3 (m, 2H), 7.52–7.61 (m, 6H), 7.41–7.45 (m, 2H), 6.30 (s, 1H), 2.50–2.55 (m, 2H), 2.34–2.40 (m, 2H), 1.48–1.55 (m, 4H), 0.73–0.81 (m, 6H)
MS ESI M+1 454.1
Example 25
Step 1 Preparation of α-[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetamide.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00127
The indicated acid (0.10 g, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in THF. CDI (0.47 g, 1.2 eq) was added and allowed to warm to 60° C. for 1 h. The reaction was cooled to room temperature and NH4OH (14.8N, 0.5 ml) was added. The reaction was then stirred for another 0.5 h. The reaction was poured into water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was dried with sodium sulfate and concentrated to give a yellow oil. The oil was then chromatographed on silica gel with hexanes:ethyl acetate (1:1) to give the amide.
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.58 (s, 2H), 7.15 (s, 4H), 7.09 (d, J=2.6 Hz, 1H), 6.55 (s, 1H), 5.27 (s, 1H), 2.83–2.94 (m, 3H),2.21–2.30 (m, 4H), 1.46–1.55 (m, 2H), 1.15–1.35 (m, 11H), 0.86 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 6H)
Step 2 Preparation of α-[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetonitrile.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00128
The title nitrile was prepared as was described for example 18, step 2 from the indicated amide (0.98 g, 1.0 eq) and (methoxycarbonylsulfamoyl)triethylammonium hydroxide, inner salt (0.143 g, 2.5 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3): 7.68 (s, 2H), 7.40 (dd, J=8.2, 62.9 Hz, 4H), 5.48 (s, 1H), 2.96 (dd, J=7.2, 14.4 Hz, 3H), 2.63 (m, 4H), 1.61 (m, 4H), 1.26 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.20 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 0.90 (t, J=7.3 Hz, 6H)
MS ESI M+1 392.2
Step 3 Preparation of 1-[4-[[4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl](1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-2,6-dipropylphenyl]-1-propanone.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00129
The title tetrazole was prepared as was described for example 18, step 3, from the indicated nitrile (0.12 g, 1.0 eq) and Me3SnN3 (0.094 g, 1.5 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CD3OD): 7.67 (s, 2H), 7.32 (dd, 4H, J=8.2, 19.9 Hz), 6.2 0(s, 1H), 2.99 (dd, 2H, J=7.2, 14.4 Hz), 2.92 (dd, 1H, J=6.8, 13.9 Hz), 2.14–2.28 (m, 4H), 1.31–1.47 (m, 4H), 1.24 (dd, J=0.8, 6.8 Hz, 6H), 1.15 (t, 3H, J=7.0 Hz), 0.75 (m, 6H).
MS ESI M+Na 457.2
Example 26
Step 1 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]]-N-[(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)sulfonyl]benzeneacetamide
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00130
The CF3CH2SO2NH2 was prepared by cooling a solution of commercially available CF3CH2SO2Cl (0.6 ml, 1 eq) in CH2Cl2 to 0° C. NH4OH (0.75 ml, 14.8 N, 2 eq) was then added dropwise. The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature overnight. The reaction was diluted with water and extracted three times with CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers were dried with Na2SO4 and concentrated. The sulfonamide was used without further purification.
The indicated acid (0.10 g, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in THF. 1,1′-Carbonyldiimidazole (0.46 g, 1.2 eq) was added and allow to warm to 60° C. for 0.5 h. The reaction was cooled to room temperature and then CF3CH2SO2NH2 (0.42 g, 1.2 eq) and 1,8-Diazabicyclo [5.4.0] undec-7-ene (0.40 g, 1.1 eq) were added. The mixture was stirred for another hour. The reaction was poured into saturated NH4Cl solution and extracted three times with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was dried with sodium sulfate and concentrated. The crude mixture was purified by HPLC on a YMC-pack C18 column CH3CN:H2O (30:90 to 100:0, 16 min gradient) containing 0.1% TFA as eluent.
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CD3OD): 7.43–7.51 (m, 6H), 5.29 (s, 1H), 4.52 (dd, 2H, J=9.1, 18.3 Hz), 2.63–2.71 (m, 2H), 2.51–2.56 (m, 2H), 1.45–1.67 (m, 4H), 0.82–0.87 (m, 6H).
MS ESI M+1 567.25
Example 27
Step 1 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]]-N-[propylsulfonyl]benzeneacetamide
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00131
PrSO2NH2 was prepared as was described for example 26 from commercially available PrSO2Cl.
The title sulfonamide was prepared from the indicated acid (0.04 g, 1.0 eq), CDI (0.019 g, 1.2 eq), and DBU (0.017 g, 1.1 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances: 1H NMR 400 MHz (CD3OD): 7.44–7.56 (m, 6H), 5.26 (s, 1H), 3.32–3.35 (m, 2H), 2.67–2.74 (m, 2H), 2.53–2.58 (m, 2H), 1.47–1.67 (m, 6H), 0.83–0.92 (m, 9H)
MS ESI M+1 527.20
Example 28
Step 1 Preparation of Ethyl 2-Bromo-2-(3-thiophene)acetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00132
Ethyl 3-thiopheneacetate (1.0 g, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in THF (50 mL) and cooled to −78° C. Lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide (6.46 mL, 1.1 eq) was added to the reaction and stirred for 20 minutes. Chlorotrimethylsilane (1.4 mL, 1.875 eq) was added at −78° C. and stirred for 20 minutes. N-bromosuccinimide (1.06 g, 1.01 eq) was added to the reaction mixture. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir and warm to room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with H2O. The organic layer was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give yellow oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using hexanes and ethyl acetate (95:5) to give the titled compound.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 7.50 (dd, 1H), 7.39 (dd, 1H), 7.32 (d, 1H) 5.75 (s, 1H), 4.28 (q, 2H), 1.36 (t, 3H)
Step 2 Preparation of Ethyl α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-3-thiopheneacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00133
The title ester was prepared as was described for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (53 mg, 0.2 mmol) and the indicated phenol (65 mg, 0.29 mmol). The product was purified by silica gel chromatography (hexanes:methyl t-butyl ether 99:1) to yield the desired ester.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 7.40 (s, 1H), 7.38 (dd, 1H), 7.36 (dd, 1H), 7.26 (dd, 1H), 5.36 (s 1H), 4.28 (q, 2H), 2.72 (m, 4H), 2.56 (m, 4H), 1.66 (m, 4H), 1.28 (t, 3H), 0.92 (m, 6H).
Step 3 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-3-thiopheneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00134
The title acid was prepared as was described for example 1, step 5, from the indicated ester (67 mg, 1.0 eq) and NaOH (0.38 mL, 5 M, 2.0 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 400 MHz (CDCl3); 7.41 (m, 2H), 7.39 (dd, 1H), 7.27 (dd, 1H). 5.48 (s, 1H), 2.54 (q, 2H), 2.51 (m, 2H), 0.90 (m, 6H),
Example 29
Step 1 Preparation of Ethyl 2-Bromo-2-(3-pyridyl)acetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00135
Ethyl 3-pyridylacetate (1.0 g, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in THF (50 mL) and cooled to −78° C. Lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide (6.66 mL, 1.1 eq) was added to the reaction and stirred for 20 minutes. Chlorotrimethylsilane (1.44 mL, 1.875 eq) was added at −78° C. and stirred for 20 minutes. N-bromosuccinimide (1.09 g, 1.01 eq) was added to the reaction mixture. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir and warm to room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with H2O. The organic layer was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give a yellow oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using hexanes and ethyl acetate (1:1) to give ethyl 2-bromo-2(3-pyridyl)acetate.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 8.70 (d, 1H), 8.63 (dd, 1H), 7.92(dt, 1), 7.36 (dd, 1H) 5.37 (s, 1H), 4.26 (q, 2H), 1.28 (t, 3H)
Step 2 Preparation of Ethyl α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-3-pyridineacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00136
The title ester was prepared as was described for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (83 mg) and the indicated phenol (98 mg). The product was purified by silica gel chromatography (hexanes:ethyl acetate 4:1) to yield the desired ester.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 8.72 (d, 1H), 8.69 (dd, 1H), 7.97 (dt, 1H), 7.41 (m, 2H), 5.36 (s 1H), 4.25 (q, 2H), 2.79 (m, 2H), 2.59 (m, 2H), 1.65 (m, 4H), 1.25 (t, 3H), 0.89 (m, 6H).
Step 3 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-3-pyridineacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00137
The title acid was prepared as was described for example 1, step 5, from the indicated ester (58 mg, 1.0 eq) and NaOH (0.33 mL, 2 M, 2.5 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 9.00(s, 1H), 8.76 (s, 1H), 8.40 (dd, 1H), 7.41 (s, 1H). 5.48 (s, 1H), 2.83 (m, 2H), 2.601 (m, 2H), 1.65 (m, 4H), 0.88 (m, 6H).
Example 30
Step 1 Preparation of methyl [4-(pyridin-2-ylmethoxy)phenyl]acetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00138
Commercially available methyl-4-hydrophenylacetate (5.00 g) was dissolved in dimethylformamide (50 mL). 2-Picolyl chloride hydrochloride (4.94 g) and cesium carbonate (24.50 g) was added. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 18 hr. The reaction mixture was diluted with H2O. The organic layer was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give a yellow oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using hexanes:ethyl acetate (60:40) to the title compound.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 8.58 (d, 1H), 7.70 (dt 1H), 7.51 (d, 1H), 7.20 (m, 3H), 6.92 (d, 2H), 5.19 (s, 2H), 3.68 (s, 3H), 3.58 (s, 2H).
Step 2 Preparation of methyl α-bromo[4-(pyridin-2-ylmethoxy)phenyl]acetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00139
The crude oil prepared above was cooled to −78° C. in THF (100 mL). Lithium bis (trimethylsilyl) amide (27.91 mL, 1.1 eq) was added to the reaction and stirred for 20 minutes. Chlorotrimethylsilane (6.04 mL, 1.875 eq) was added at −78° C. and stirred for 20 minutes. N-bromosuccinimide (4.74 g, 1.05 eq) was added to the reaction mixture. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir and warm to room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with H2O. The organic layer was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give a yellow oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel using hexanes:ethyl acetate (1:1) to give the title bromide.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 8.61 (d, 1H), 7.72 (dt 1H), 7.50 (dt, 1H), 7.42(d, 2H), 7.24 (m, 1H), 6.99 (d, 2H), 5.34 (d, 1H), 5.22 (s, 2H) 3.78 (s, 3H).
Step 3 Preparation of Methyl α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-[pyridin-2-ylmethoxy]benzeneacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00140
The title ester was prepared as for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (5.31 g, 15.80 mmol) and the indicated phenol (4.54 g, 15.80 mmol). The product was purified by silica gel chromatography (toluene) to yield the desired ester.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 8.62 (d, 1H), 7.74 (dt 1H), 7.52 (dt, 1H), 7.42(m, 3H), 7.26 (m, 1H), 7.02 (d, 2H), 5.26 (s, 2H), 5.21 (s, 1H) 3.78 (s, 3H), 2.71 (m, 2H), 2.54 (m, 2H), 1.64 (m, 4H), 0.89 (m, 6H)
Step 4 Preparation of racemic α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-[pyridin-2-ylmethoxy]benzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00141
The ester (1.56 grams, 1.0 Eq) was dissolved in methanol (10 ml). Aqueous NaOH (2.5 M, 5.91 ml) was added. The mixture stirred at room temperature for 3 Hrs. The reaction mixture was acidified by 1 equivalent acetic acid. The mixture was washed with water. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give white solid.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 8.61 (d, 1H), 7.8 (dt, 1H), 7.58 (d, 1H), 7.36 (m, 4H), 6.89 (d, 2H), 5.16 (m, 3H), 2.64 (m, 2H), 2.48 (m, 2H), 1.52 (m, 4H), 0.82 (m, 6H)
Step 5 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-[pyridin-2-ylmethoxy]benzeneacetic acid (R)Pyrrolidinelactamide ester.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00142
The acid (0.358 g) was dissolved in methylene chloride(3 mL). Pyrrolidine (R)lactamide (0.116 g) and 4-(dimethylamino)pyridine (8.3 mg) was added. The reaction was cooled to 0 C and dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (0.154 g) was added. The reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 18 hrs. The reaction mixture was filtered to remove the solids. The filtrate was concentrated. The diastereoisomers were separated by silica gel chromatography (toluene/acetonitrile 80:20) to yield the titled compound.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 8.62(d, 1H), 7.74 (dt, 1H), 7.52 (d, 1H), 7.42 (d, 2H), 7.37 (s, 1H), 7.26 (m, 1H), 7.20 (d, 2H), 5.29 (s, 1H), 5.27 (q, 1H), 3.71(m, 2H), 3.43 (m, 1H), 3.35 (m, 1H), 2.68 (m, 2H), 2.54 (m, 2H) 1.94 (m, 2H), 1.85 (m, 2H), 1.60 (m, 4H), 1.39 (d, 3H), 0.85 (m, 6H)
Step, 6 Preparation of α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-[pyridin-2-ylmethoxy]benzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00143
The ester (143 mg, 1.0 eq) was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (1 ml). Aqueous lithum hydroxide (1.0 M, 0.438 ml, 2.0 eq) was diluted into aqueous hydrogen peroxide (30% nominal, 0.337 ml). The solution of LiOOH was added to the methanol solution of the ester at RT. After 1 Hr the mixture was quenched with 1 M acetic acid and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate and the solvent was evaporated to give a oil. The resulting oil was chromatographed on silica gel with hexanes:ethyl acetate plus 1% acetic acid as eluent (20:80) to give the titled compound.
The enantiomeric excess of the final product was determined by HPLC using a ChiralCel OD-R analytical column with acetonitrile water 0.1% TFA as eluent.
Example 31
Step 1 Preparation of Ethyl α-[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-3-pyridineacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00144
The title ester was prepared as was described for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide (104 mg) and the indicated phenol (106 mg). The product was purified by silica gel chromatography (toluene:hexanes 90:10) to yield the desired ester.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 8.70 (s, 1H), 8.65 (d, 1H), 7.93 (dd, 1H), 7.60 (s, 2H), 7.39 (dt, 1H), 5.22 (s 1H), 4.23 (q, 2H), 2.97(m, 2H), 2.45 (m, 4H), 1.56 (m, 4H), 1.23 (m, 6H), 0.83 (m, 6H).
Step 2 Preparation of α-[4-(1-oxopropyl)-2,6-dipropylphenoxy]-3-pyridineacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00145
The title acid was prepared as was described for example 1, step 5 from the indicated ester (98 mg, 1.0 eq) and NaOH (0.491 mL, 5 M, 2.5 eq).
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 8.92(s, 1H), 8.80 (d, 1H), 8.40 (dd, 1H), 7.78 (dt, 1H),7.61 (s, 2H), 5.40 (s, 1H), 2.95 (q, 2H), 2.49 (m, 4H), 1.58 (m, 4H), 1.25 (t, 3H), 0.80 (m, 6H).
Example 32
Step 1 Preparation of Methyl 2-Bromo-2-(2-phenyl-1,3-thiazol-4-yl)acetate
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00146
To a solution of the starting ester (420 mg, 1.0 eq) in CCl4 (20 mL) were added NBS (650 mg, 2.0 eq) and catalytic amount of AIBN. The mixture was stirred at 70° C. under N2 for 8 h. After cooling to ambient temperature, the precipitate was removed by filtration. The filtrate was concentrated in vac. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, EtOAc/Hexanes 1:4) gave the desired product.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 7.97 (m, 2H), 7.68 (s, 1H), 7.47 (m, 3H), 5.72 (s, 1H), 3.89 (s, 3H).
Step 2 Preparation of Methyl α-[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy)-2-(2-phenyl-1,3-thiazol-4-yl)acetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00147
The title ester was prepared as was described for example 1, step 4 from the indicated bromide and phenol. The resulting solid was purified by chromatography on silica gel using ethyl acetate and hexane (1:9) as eluent to give the titled compound.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 7.96 (m, 2H), 7.47 (m, 3H), 7.43 (s, 1H+1H), 5.63 (s, 1H), 3.87 (s, 3H), 2.84 (m, 2H), 2.63 (t, 2H), 1.8–1.6 (m, overlapping signals, 4H), 0.93 (t+t, 6H).
Step 3 Preparation of α-[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy)-2-(2-phenyl-1,3-thiazol-4-yl)acetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00148
The title acid was prepared as was described for example 1, step 5 from the indicated ester (1.0 eq) and aqueous NaOH (1.1 eq). The resulting oil was crystallized from hexanes to give the titled compound.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 7.95 (m, 2H), 7.48 (m, 3H), 7.42 (s, 1H), 7.36 (s, 1H), 5.60 (s, 1H), 2.79 (m, 2H), 2.61 (t, 2H), 1.8–1.6 (m, overlapping signals, 4H), 0.91 (t+t, 6H).
Example 33
Step 1 Preparation of 2,6-diallyl-4-benzyloxyphenol.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00149
To a solution of starting 4-benzyloxyphenol (20 g) in acetone (800 mL) were added allylbromide (50 mL) and K2CO3 (60 g). The reaction mixture was refluxed overnight. After cooling to the room temperature, the insoluble materials were removed by filtration. The filtrate was concentrated in vac. The residue was partitioned between ethyl ether (500 mL) and 2N aqueous NaOH (200 mL). The organic layer was washed with water and brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated in vac. to give the desired product.
The neat allyl ether (21 g) obtained above was heated at 230° C. under N2 atmosphere for 3 h to give after cooling to room temperature the desired 2-allyl4-benzyloxyphenol, which was used in the next step without further purification.
To a solution of the above obtained 2-allyl-4-benzyloxyphenol (21 g) in DMF (200 mL) were added Cs2CO3 (57 g) and allylbromide (38 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight before it was poured into ether (1.0 L), washed with water (2×) and brine, dried over anhydrous MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated in vac. to give the desired allyl ether.
The neat allyl ether (22 g) obtained above was heated at 230° C. under N2 atmosphere for 3 h to give the desired 2,6-diallyl-4-benzyloxyphenol, which was purified by flash chrotography (SiO2, EtOAc/Hexanes 1:20).
NMR (CDCl3) δ7.50–7.30 (m, overlapping signals, 5H), 6.69 (s, 2H), 6.00 (m, 2H), 5.18 (m, 2H), 5.15 (m, 2H), 5.00 (s, 2H), 5.48 (s, broad, 1H), 3.40 (dd, 4H).
Step 2. Preparation of Methyl α-(4-hydroxy-2,6-dipropylphenoxy)-4-chloro benzeneacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00150
To a solution of 2,6-diallyl-4-benzyloxyphenol (200 mg, 1.0 eq) in DMF (8 mL) were added methyl α-bromo-4-chlorobenzeneacetate (190 mg, 1.0 eq) and Cs2CO3 (285 mg, 1.2 eq). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 h, poured into ether, washed with water and brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered, and concentrated in vac. Purification by chromatography (SiO2, EtOAc/Hexanes 1:20) afforded the desired methyl α-(2,6-diallyl-4-hydroxyphenoxy)-4-chlorobenzeneacetate.
The above obtained compound (150 mg) was dissolved in EtOAc (10 mL) and hydrogenated under H2 atmosphere (balloon, 1 atm) in the presence of catalytic amount of 10% Pd/C at room temperature for 1 h. The catalyst was removed by filtration. The filtrate was concentrated in vac to give the titled compound.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 7.45 (d, 2H), 7.39 (d, 2H), 6.49 (s, 2H), 5.05 (s, 1H), 4.78 (s, broad, 1H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 2.32 (m, 4H), 1.44 (m, 4H), 0.80 (t, 6H).
Step 3 Preparation of Methyl α-[2,6-dipropyl-4-[2-(5-methyl-2-phenyl-1,3-oxazol-4-yl)ethoxy]phenoxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetate.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00151
To a mixture of starting phenol (100 mg, 1.0 eq) and 2-(5-methyl-2-phenyl-1,3-oxazol-4-yl)ethanol (68 mg, 1.2 eq) in CH2Cl2 (5 mL) were added Ph3P (145 mg, 2.0 eq) and DIAD (0.13 mL, 2.0 eq). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 24 h. Purification by flash chromatography (SiO2, EtOAc/Hexanes 1:4) gave the desired coupling product.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3) δ8.00 (d, 2H), 7.45 (m, overlapping signals, 5H), 7.36 (d, 2H), 6.63 (s, 2H), 5.03 (s, 1H), 4.19 (t, 2H), 3.75 (s, 3H), 2.96 (t, 2H), 2.38 (s, 3H), 2.34 (m, 4H), 1.47 (m, 4H), 0.81 (t, 6H).
Step 4 Preparation of α-[2,6-dipropyl-4-[2-(5-methyl-2-phenyl-1,3-oxazol-4-yl)ethoxy]phenoxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetic acid.
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00152
The title acid was prepared as was described for example 1, step 5 from the indicated ester (1.0 eq) and aquoues NaOH (1.1 eq). The resulting oil was crystallized from hexanes to give the titled compound.
Characteristic NMR Resonances; 1H NMR 500 MHz (CDCl3); 8.00 (m, 2H), 7.45 (m, 3H), 7.40 (d, 2H), 7.37 (d, 2H), 6.53 (s, 2H), 5.07 (s, 1H), 4.19 (t, 2H), 2.98 (t, 2H), 2.39 (s, 3H), 2.30 (m, 4H), 1.55 (m, 2H), 1.45 (m, 2H), 0.82 (t, 6H).

Claims (28)

1. A compound having the formula I:
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00153
including pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein
R1 is selected from the group consisting of (a) halogen, (b) C1-6 alkyl, where alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F, and (c) —OC1–C6 alkyl, where —OC1–C6 alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens, independently selected from Cl and F, with the proviso that R1 and R2 are not both CH3;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of C1–C6 alkyl and C3–C12 Alicyclic, wherein alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F, and Alicyclic is optionally substituted with 1–5 halogens;
R3 and R4 are joined together to yield a 5-membered ring containing (a) 1–3 heteroatoms selected from O, N and S, (b) 2–5 carbon atoms, and (c) optionally one carbonyl group, wherein the 5-membered ring is fused to the benzene ring, and the benzene ring and fused 5-membered ring together form a Heteroaryl or Heterocycle which optionally contains one carbonyl group in the 5-membered fused ring and which is optionally substituted on the 5-membered fused ring with 1–2 substituents independently selected from R8;
R5 is H or Halogen;
R6 is selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, CH3 and CF3;
Each R7 is independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, C1–C6 alkyl, C1–C6 alkoxy, —SC1-6alkyl, —OAryl, C2–C6 alkenyl, C2–C6 alkynyl, —CN, —C(O)OC1–C3 alkyl, and —C(O)C1–C3alkyl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy and alkynyl and each alkyl portion of a substituent is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–5 halogen atoms and/or 1 substituent selected form Aryl and Heteroaryl, and each Aryl and Heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1–3 groups independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3;
Each R8 is independently selected from the group consisting of (a) —OC1–C5 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 F; (b) C1–C9 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with one Aryl, 1–5 halogens independently selected from Cl and F, and/or one —COOH; (c) Aryl; and (d) Heteroaryl; wherein Aryl and Heteroaryl are optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of Cl, F, C1–C5 alkyl, and —OC1–C5alkyl, wherein each alkyl and each —OC1–C5alkyl may be linear or branched, and is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen —OCH3, and —OCF3;
Aryl is an aromatic carbocyclic mono- or bicyclic ring system containing 6–10 atoms in the ring or rings;
Heteroaryl is a mono- or bicyclic aromatic ring system containing 4–11 atoms in the ring or rings, wherein at least one atom in the ring or rings is a heteroatom selected from N, O and S;
Heterocycle is a fully or partially saturated monocyclic or bicyclic ring system having 4–11 atoms in the ring or rings and at least one heteroatom selected from O, N, and S in the ring or rings;
Alicyclic is a substituent group that has one C3–C6cycloalkyl and one or more alkyl groups which may be linear or branched attached to the cycloalkyl group, wherein the point of attachment may be through the cycloalkyl or through an alkyl group;
Ar1 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl and pyridyl, and is optionally substituted with Aryl, pyridyl or 1–3 groups independently selected from R7;
X is O or S; and
Z is selected from the group consisting of —COOH, tetrazole, and —C(O)NHS(O)2R8.
2. The compound having formula I as recited in claim 1, wherein X is O.
3. The compound having formula I as recited in claim 1, wherein Z is —CO2H.
4. A compound according to claim 1 having formula 1a:
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00154
including pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein
A-B and B—C are each connected by a bond, and optionally A-B or B—C can be a double bond, thereby yielding a five-membered ring fused to the benzene ring to which A and C are bonded, wherein A, B, and C are each independently selected from N, NR9, C, CR9, CR9 2, C═O, O, S, S(O), and S(O)2, wherein at least one of A, B, and C comprises a heteroatom selected from N, S and O that is in the ring;
Each R9 is independently selected from R8 and H; and
R1, R2, R6, R7, R8, Ar1, X and Z are as defined in claim 1.
5. A compound having formula I as recited in claim 1, wherein X is O and Z is —CO2H.
6. A compound having formula I as recited in claim 1, wherein Ar1 is phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 groups independently selected from R7.
7. A compound as recited in claim 1, wherein
R1 is selected from Cl, F, and C2–C4 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F;
R2 is C2–C4 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F;
R3 and R4 are joined together to form a membered 5-membered ring containing 1–3 heteroatoms selected from S, N, and O in the ring that is fused to the benzene ring to which R3 and R4 are attached, so that the benzene ring and 5-membered ring together form a fused ring system selected from benzisoxazole, benzisothiazole, benzthiazole, benzoxazole, benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzimidazole, indole, benzoxazolone, benzisoxazolone; and benzimidazolone, wherein the ring is optionally substituted with 1–2 substituents independently selected from R8;
R6 is selected from H, halogen, CH3, and CF3;
R7 is selected from the group consisting of C1–C6alkyl, —OAryl, C3–C12Alicyclic, —OC1–C6alkyl, —SC1–C6alkyl and —C(O)C1–C3alkyl, wherein alkyl in each occurrence is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens and/or one substituent selected from Aryl and Heteroaryl, and each Aryl and Heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3;
Each R8 is independently selected from halogen, C1–C3alkyl, and phenyl, wherein C1–C3alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens, and phenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3;
and R5, R9, Ar1, X and Z are as defined in claim 1.
8. A compound as recited in claim 4, wherein the group -A-B—C—, in which the bonds between A and B and between B and C are optionally single or double bonds, is selected from the group consisting of:
—C(R9)═N—O—,
—C(R9)═N—S—,
—C(R9)2—N(R9)—O—,
—C(R9)2—N(R9)—S—,
—N(R9)—C(═O)—O—,
—N(R9)—C(═O)—S—,
—N(R9)—O—C(═O)—,
—N(R9)—S—C(═O)—,
—N═C(R9)—O—,
—N═C(R9)—S—,
—N(R9)—C(R9)2—O—,
—N(R9)—C(R9)2—S—,
—C(═O)—N(R9)—O—;
—C(═O)—N(R9)—S—;
—C(═O)—O—N(R9)—; and
—C(═O)—S—N(R9)—;
or the group —C—B-A- is selected from the group consisting of:
—C(R9)═N—O—,
—C(R9)═N—S—,
—C(R9)2—N(R9)—O—,
—C(R9)2—N(R9)—S—,
—N(R9)—C(═O)—O—,
—N(R9)—C(═O)—S—,
—N(R9)—O—C(═O)—,
—N(R9)—S—C(═O)—,
—N═C(R9)—O—,
—N═C(R9)—S—,
—N(R9)—C(R9)2—O—,
—N(R9)—C(R9)2—S—,
—C(═O)—N(R9)—O—;
—C(═O)—N(R9)—S—;
—C(═O)—O—N(R9)—; and
—C(═O)—S—N(R9)—.
9. A compound as recited in claim 8, wherein
R1 is selected from Cl, F, and C2–C4 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F;
R2 is C2–C4 alkyl, which may be linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F;
R6 is selected from H, halogen, CH3, and CF3;
Each R7 is independently selected from the group consisting of C1–C6alkyl, —OAryl, C3–C12Alicyclic, —OC1–C6alkyl, —SC1–C6alkyl and —C(O)C1–C3alkyl, wherein alkyl in each occurrence is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens, and Aryl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3;
R8 is independently selected from halogen, C1–C3alkyl, and phenyl, wherein C1–C3alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3 halogens, and phenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3;
Each R9 is independently selected from R8 and H;
and R5, Ar1, X and Z are as defined in claim 1.
10. A compound as recited in claim 9, wherein the group -A-B—C— is selected from —C(R9)═N—O—, —C(═O)—N(R9)—O—, and —N(R9)—C(═O)—O—;
R1 is selected from Cl, F and linear or branched C2–C4alkyl;
R2 is linear or branched C2–C4alkyl;
R6 is H;
Each R7 is independently selected from F, Cl, C1–C4 alkyl, —OC1–C4 alkyl, —SC1–C4 alkyl, and —Ophenyl, wherein in each instance, alkyl is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–5 F, and —Ophenyl is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3; and
R8 is selected from C1-5 alkyl, which is linear or branched and is optionally substituted with 1–3F, and phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 substituents independently selected from halogen, CH3, CF3, —OCH3 and —OCF3.
11. A compound as recited in claim 10, wherein
R1 is selected from Cl, F and n-C3–C4alkyl;
R2 is n-C3–C4alkyl; and
Ar1 is phenyl, which is optionally substituted with 1–3 groups independently selected from R7.
12. A compound represented by any of the structures shown below, including pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof:
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00155
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00156
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00157
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00158
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00159
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00160
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00161
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00162
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00163
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00164
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00165
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00166
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00167
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00168
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00169
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00170
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00171
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00172
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00173
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00174
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00175
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00176
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00177
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00178
Figure US07091230-20060815-C00179
13. A compound as described below, including pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof:
α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxyl]benzeneacetic acid;
α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetic acid;
α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-[(trifluoromethyl)thio]benzeneacetic acid;
α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid;
α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-(2-methylpropyl)benzeneacetic acid;
α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid;
α-[[5-chloro-7-propyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-chlorobenzeneacetic acid;
α-[[5-chloro-3-ethyl-7-propyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid;
α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-phenyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid;
α-[[5-chloro-3-phenyl-7-propyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]benzeneacetic acid;
α-[(2,3-dihydro-2-methyl-3-oxo-5,7-dipropyl-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl)oxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid;
α-[(2,3-dihydro-3-(1-methylethyl)-2-oxo-5,7-dipropyl-1,3-benzoxazol-6-yl)oxy]-4-(1-methylethyl)benzeneacetic acid;
6-[phenyl(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole;
6-[(4-chlorophenyl)(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole;
6-[[4-(1-methylethyl)phenyl](1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole;
6-[(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole;
6-[[4-(2-methylpropyl)phenyl](1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole;
6-[(4-ethylphenyl)(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazole;
6-[(phenyl)(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)methoxy]-5,7-dipropyl-3-phenyl-1,2-benzisoxazole;
α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]]-N-[(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)sulfonyl]benzeneacetamide;
α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]]-N-[propylsulfonyl]benzeneacetamide;
α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-3-thiopheneacetic acid;
α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-3-pyridineacetic acid;
α-[[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy]-4-[pyridin-2-ylmethoxy]benzeneacetic acid; and
α-[5,7-dipropyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1,2-benzisoxazol-6-yl]oxy)-2-(2-phenyl-1,3-thiazol-4-yl)acetic acid.
14. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
15. A compound as recited in claim 1, wherein the stereochemistry at the C that is attached to Z, Ar1, R6 and X is R.
16. A compound as recited in claim 1, wherein the stereochemistry at the C that is attached to Z, Ar1, R6 and X is S.
17. A method for treating or controlling non-insulin dependent (Type 2) diabetes mellitus in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
18. A method for treating or controlling hyperglycemia in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
19. A method for treating or controlling lipid disorders, hyperlipidemia, or low HDL in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
20. A method for treating or controlling obesity in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
21. A method for treating or controlling hypercholesterolemia in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
22. A method for treating or controlling hypertriglyceridemia in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
23. A method for treating or controlling dyslipidemia and/or low HDL cholesterol in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
24. A method for treating or controlling atherosclerosis in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
25. A method for treating or controlling cachexia in a mammalian patient in need of such treatment which comprises administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
26. A method for the treatment or control of one or more conditions selected from hypercholesterolemia, atherosclerosis, low HDL levels, high LDL levels, hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, and dyslipidemia, which method comprises administering to a mammalian patient in need of such treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of claim 1 and a therapeutically effective amount of an HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor.
27. The method as recited in claim 26, wherein the HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor is a statin.
28. The method as recited in claim 27, wherein the statin is selected from the group consisting of lovastatin, simvastatin, pravastatin, fluvastatin, atorvastatin, itavastatin, ZD-4522 and rivastatin.
US10/470,954 2001-02-09 2002-02-05 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders Expired - Fee Related US7091230B2 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10/470,954 US7091230B2 (en) 2001-02-09 2002-02-05 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders
US11/334,152 US7495020B2 (en) 2001-02-09 2006-01-18 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US26780901P 2001-02-09 2001-02-09
US60267809 2001-02-09
US10/470,954 US7091230B2 (en) 2001-02-09 2002-02-05 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders
PCT/US2002/004680 WO2002064094A2 (en) 2001-02-09 2002-02-05 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/334,152 Division US7495020B2 (en) 2001-02-09 2006-01-18 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20040092596A1 US20040092596A1 (en) 2004-05-13
US7091230B2 true US7091230B2 (en) 2006-08-15

Family

ID=23020208

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/470,954 Expired - Fee Related US7091230B2 (en) 2001-02-09 2002-02-05 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders
US11/334,152 Expired - Fee Related US7495020B2 (en) 2001-02-09 2006-01-18 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/334,152 Expired - Fee Related US7495020B2 (en) 2001-02-09 2006-01-18 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (2) US7091230B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1366012A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2004521124A (en)
AU (1) AU2002251978B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2437118A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2002064094A2 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008030604A2 (en) 2006-09-08 2008-03-13 Rhode Island Hospital Treatment, prevention, and reversal of alcohol-induced brain disease

Families Citing this family (31)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
PE20020323A1 (en) * 2000-08-22 2002-06-13 Novartis Ag PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION INCLUDING AN INSULIN SECRETION ENHANCER AND HMG-Co-A-REDUCTASE INHIBITORS OR ANGIOTENSIN CONVERTER ENZYME (ACE) INHIBITORS
NZ525921A (en) * 2001-01-26 2005-06-24 Schering Corp Combinations of peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor (PPAR) activator(s) and sterol absorption inhibitor(s) and treatments for vascular indications
EP1353695A2 (en) * 2001-01-26 2003-10-22 Schering Corporation Combinations of nicotinic acid and derivatives thereof and sterol absorption inhibitor(s) and treatments for vascular indications
PT1385548E (en) * 2001-01-26 2007-08-24 Schering Corp Combinations of sterol absorption inhibitor(s) with cardiovascular agent(s) for the treatment of vascular conditions
ATE369851T1 (en) * 2001-01-26 2007-09-15 Schering Corp COMBINATIONS OF BALE ACID SEQUESTRANTS AND STEROL ABSORPTION INHIBITORS FOR THE TREATMENT OF CARDIOVASCULAR INDICATIONS
US20020147184A1 (en) * 2001-01-26 2002-10-10 Schering Corporation Combinations of sterol absorption inhibitor(s) with blood modifier(s) for treating vascular conditions
AU2003225027A1 (en) * 2002-04-16 2003-11-03 Merck And Co., Inc. Combination therapy using a ppar alpha/gamma agonist
AU2003233244B2 (en) * 2002-06-07 2010-05-20 Cortical Pty Ltd Therapeutic molecules and methods-1
FR2845602B1 (en) * 2002-10-11 2005-07-08 Servier Lab ASSOCIATION BETWEEN A LIGAND OF RECEPTORS ACTIVE BY PEROXISOME PROLIFIERS AND AN ANTIOXIDANT AGENT AND THE PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM
FR2845601B1 (en) * 2002-10-11 2005-07-08 Servier Lab NOVEL ASSOCIATION BETWEEN A HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUND AND ANTIOXIDANT AGENT AND THE PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM
ATE404191T1 (en) * 2002-12-10 2008-08-15 Novartis Pharma Ag COMBINATIONS OF A DPP-IV INHIBITOR AND A PPAR-ALPHA AGONIST
EA011009B1 (en) 2003-01-14 2008-12-30 Арена Фармасьютикалз Инк. 1,2,3-substituted aryl and heteroaryl derivatives as modulators of metabolism and the prophylaxis and treatment of disorders related thereto such as diabetes and hyperglycemia
ATE384526T1 (en) * 2003-04-14 2008-02-15 Inst For Pharm Discovery Inc N-(((((1,3-THIAZOL-2-YL)AMINO)CARBONYL)PHENYL)SULPHONYL)PHENYLALANINE DERIVATIVES AND RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR THE TREATMENT OF DIABETES
EA200501710A1 (en) 2003-04-30 2006-06-30 ДЗЕ ИНСТИТЬЮТС ФОР ФАРМАСЬЮТИКАЛ ДИСКАВЕРИ, ЭлЭлСи SUBSTITUTED CARBON ACIDS
US7718377B2 (en) 2003-05-29 2010-05-18 Kyoto Pharmaceutical Industries, Ltd. Insulin resistance curative and method of screening the same
US7132426B2 (en) 2003-07-14 2006-11-07 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fused-aryl and heteroaryl derivatives as modulators of metabolism and the prophylaxis and treatment of disorders related thereto
WO2006057505A1 (en) * 2004-11-25 2006-06-01 Lg Life Sciences, Ltd. NOVEL COMPOUNDS AS AGONIST FOR PPARϜ AND PPARα, METHOD FOR PREPARATION OF THE SAME, AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION CONTAINING THE SAME
KR20060058632A (en) * 2004-11-25 2006-05-30 주식회사 엘지생명과학 Novel compounds as agonist for ppargamma and pparalpha, method for preparation of the same, and pharmaceutical composition containing the same
JP4638512B2 (en) * 2005-03-04 2011-02-23 メルク・シャープ・エンド・ドーム・コーポレイション Condensed aromatic compounds having anti-diabetic activity
US8288438B2 (en) * 2005-03-21 2012-10-16 Metabolex, Inc. Methods for avoiding edema in the treatment or prevention of PPARγ-responsive diseases, including cancer
US20070161006A1 (en) * 2006-01-10 2007-07-12 Vita Genomics, Inc. Single nucleotide polymorphisms in protein-tyrosine phosphatase receptor-type delta for the diagnosis of susceptibility to infection and asthma
WO2008137105A1 (en) 2007-05-07 2008-11-13 Merck & Co., Inc. Method of treatment using fused aromatic compounds having anti-diabetic activity
US8383833B2 (en) * 2008-06-03 2013-02-26 Kaneka Corporation Method for producing optically active amino acid derivative
JP5374085B2 (en) * 2008-07-22 2013-12-25 株式会社 資生堂 Process for producing 4-alkylresorcinol and 4-alkenylresorcinol
CN101811968B (en) * 2010-02-09 2014-07-30 深圳市有为化学技术有限公司 Multi-functionalized benzoylformicacid hydroxy-ketone ester compounds and photoinitiator containing compounds
EA201390421A1 (en) 2010-09-22 2013-09-30 Арена Фармасьютикалз, Инк. GPR119 RECEPTOR MODULATORS AND TREATMENT OF RELATED DISORDERS
WO2013071077A1 (en) 2011-11-09 2013-05-16 Cornell University The use of pan-ppar agonists for prevention and treatment of huntington's disease and tauopathies
WO2014142255A1 (en) 2013-03-14 2014-09-18 武田薬品工業株式会社 Heterocyclic compound
UA126268C2 (en) 2015-01-06 2022-09-14 Арена Фармасьютікалз, Інк. Methods of treating conditions related to the s1p1 receptor
PL3310760T3 (en) 2015-06-22 2023-03-06 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Crystalline l-arginine salt of (r)-2-(7-(4-cyclopentyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)benzyloxy)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydrocyclo-penta[b]indol-3-yl)acetic acid for use in s1p1 receptor-associated disorders
JP2020507611A (en) 2017-02-16 2020-03-12 アリーナ ファーマシューティカルズ, インコーポレイテッド Compounds and methods for the treatment of primary biliary cholangitis

Citations (41)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3378582A (en) 1964-03-20 1968-04-16 Merck & Co Inc (alpha-phenoxy)-and (alpha-phenylthio)-omegaphenyl-alkanoic acids
US3517050A (en) 1966-10-03 1970-06-23 Merck & Co Inc Ester and amide derivative of (3-trifluoromethylphenoxy) (4 - halophenyl)acetic acid
US3787423A (en) 1972-03-08 1974-01-22 Merck & Co Inc Beta-picolyloxy ester of(3-trifluoromethylphenoxy)(4-chlorophenyl)acetic acid and derivatives
US3816446A (en) 1972-04-11 1974-06-11 Merck & Co Inc (alpha-(3-trifluoromethylphenoxy)-4-chlorobenzyl)heterocycles
US3953465A (en) 1972-04-11 1976-04-27 Merck & Co., Inc. 2-[α-(3-Trifluoromethylphenoxyl)-4-chlorobenzyl]oxazole and methods for preparing the same
US4125732A (en) 1977-05-06 1978-11-14 American Cyanamid Company 2-Aryloxy-2-(phenoxyalkoxy)phenyl acetic acid and esters
US4125729A (en) 1975-09-25 1978-11-14 American Cyanamid Company Hypolipemic α-aryloxy para substituted phenyl acetic acid compounds
US4168385A (en) 1975-09-25 1979-09-18 American Cyanamid Company Hypolipemic phenylacetic acid derivatives
US4748272A (en) 1986-08-01 1988-05-31 Rorer Pharmaceutical Corp. Phenoxyphenylacetates for use as potential modulators of arichidonic acid pathways
US4820715A (en) 1984-06-28 1989-04-11 Bristol-Myers Company Anti-emetic quinuclidinyl benzamides
US5059610A (en) 1987-11-03 1991-10-22 Rhone-Poulenc Rorer Pharmaceuticals Inc. Quinoline derivatives and their use as antagonists of leukotriene d4
US5177095A (en) 1990-02-13 1993-01-05 Merck & Co., Inc. Triazole angiotensin II antagonists incorporating a substituted benzyl element
US5183810A (en) 1990-02-13 1993-02-02 Merck & Co., Inc. Imidazole angiotensin II antagonists incorporating a substituted benzyl element
US5240938A (en) 1991-02-13 1993-08-31 Merck & Co., Inc. Angiotensin II antagonists incorporating a substituted pyridoimidazolyl ring
US5264439A (en) 1990-02-13 1993-11-23 Merck & Co., Inc. Quinazolinone, triazolinone and pyrimidinone angiotensin II antagonists incorporating a substituted benzyl element
US5334598A (en) 1993-03-19 1994-08-02 Merck & Co., Inc. Six-membered ring fused imidazoles substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
EP0617001A1 (en) 1993-03-19 1994-09-28 Merck & Co. Inc. Phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
US5374638A (en) 1993-03-19 1994-12-20 Merck & Co., Inc. Six membered ring fused imidazoles substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives used to treat asthma
WO1995003044A1 (en) 1993-07-20 1995-02-02 Merck & Co., Inc. Benzimidazolinones substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
US5401745A (en) 1993-03-19 1995-03-28 Merck & Co., Inc. Quinazolinones substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
US5420133A (en) 1993-03-19 1995-05-30 Merck & Co., Inc. Quinazolinones substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
US5449682A (en) 1990-02-13 1995-09-12 Merck & Co., Inc. Angiotensin II antagonists incorporating a substituted benzyl element
WO1996009818A1 (en) 1994-09-27 1996-04-04 Merck & Co., Inc. Endothelin receptor antagonists for the treatment of emesis
US5519138A (en) 1991-07-15 1996-05-21 Dr. Karl Thomae Gmbh Phenylalkyl derivatives, with pharmaceutical activity
US5538991A (en) 1994-09-14 1996-07-23 Merck & Co., Inc. Endothelin antagonists bearing 5-membered heterocyclic amides
US5559135A (en) 1994-09-14 1996-09-24 Merck & Co., Inc. Endothelin antagonists bearing pyridyl amides
US5565485A (en) 1993-03-19 1996-10-15 Merck & Co., Inc. Biphenyl compounds useful or endothelin antagonists
US5596124A (en) 1994-12-09 1997-01-21 American Cyanamid Company Method for safening herbicides in cereal crops using 5-aryloxy-1,2-(disubstituted)benzene compounds
WO1997021693A1 (en) 1995-12-12 1997-06-19 Merck & Co., Inc. Stereoselective process
WO1997021700A1 (en) 1995-12-12 1997-06-19 Merck & Co., Inc. Process for the preparation of an endothelin antagonist
US5688974A (en) 1995-12-12 1997-11-18 Merck & Co., Inc. Process for the preparation of an endothelin antagonist
US5708186A (en) 1995-12-12 1998-01-13 Merck & Co Inc Stereoselective process
US5767310A (en) 1993-03-19 1998-06-16 Merck & Co., Inc. Phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
US5821256A (en) 1995-08-16 1998-10-13 Merck Patent Gesellschaft Mit Beschrankter Haftung Endothelin receptor antagonists
WO1998055454A2 (en) 1997-06-05 1998-12-10 Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Benzofurans and benzothophenes as suppressors of neurodegeneration
WO1999058521A1 (en) 1998-05-12 1999-11-18 American Home Products Corporation 11-aryl-benzo[b]naphtho[2,3-d]furans and 11-aryl-benzo[b]naphtho[2,3-d]thiophenes useful in the treatment of insulin resistance and hyperglycemia
WO1999058519A1 (en) 1998-05-12 1999-11-18 American Home Products Corporation Phenyl oxo-acetic acids useful in the treatment of insulin resistance and hyperglycemia
US5994356A (en) 1996-04-10 1999-11-30 Karl Thomae Carboxylic acid derivatives, medicaments comprising these compounds, their use and processes for their production
US6110963A (en) 1998-05-12 2000-08-29 American Home Products Corporation Aryl-oxo-acetic acids useful in the treatment of insulin resistance and hyperglycemia
WO2000074666A2 (en) 1999-06-04 2000-12-14 Metabolex, Inc. Use of (-) (3-trihalomethylphenoxy) (4-halophenyl) acetic acid derivatives for treatment of insulin resistance, type 2 diabetes, hyperlipidaemia and hyperuricaemia
WO2002044113A2 (en) 2000-11-28 2002-06-06 Metabolex, Inc. Use of(-) (3-halomethylphenoxy) (4-halophenyl) acetic acid derivatives for treatment of insulin resistance, type 2 diabetes, hyperlipidemia and hyperuricemia

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
ES2194179T3 (en) * 1996-02-02 2003-11-16 Merck & Co Inc HETEROCICLIC DERIVATIVES AS ANTIDIABETIC AGENTS AND ANTIOBESITY.
ES2202582T3 (en) * 1996-02-02 2004-04-01 MERCK & CO., INC. ANTIDIABETIC AGENTS.
EP1259494A4 (en) * 2000-02-18 2004-09-15 Merck & Co Inc Aryloxyacetic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders

Patent Citations (43)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3378582A (en) 1964-03-20 1968-04-16 Merck & Co Inc (alpha-phenoxy)-and (alpha-phenylthio)-omegaphenyl-alkanoic acids
US3517050A (en) 1966-10-03 1970-06-23 Merck & Co Inc Ester and amide derivative of (3-trifluoromethylphenoxy) (4 - halophenyl)acetic acid
US3787423A (en) 1972-03-08 1974-01-22 Merck & Co Inc Beta-picolyloxy ester of(3-trifluoromethylphenoxy)(4-chlorophenyl)acetic acid and derivatives
US3816446A (en) 1972-04-11 1974-06-11 Merck & Co Inc (alpha-(3-trifluoromethylphenoxy)-4-chlorobenzyl)heterocycles
US3953465A (en) 1972-04-11 1976-04-27 Merck & Co., Inc. 2-[α-(3-Trifluoromethylphenoxyl)-4-chlorobenzyl]oxazole and methods for preparing the same
US4125729A (en) 1975-09-25 1978-11-14 American Cyanamid Company Hypolipemic α-aryloxy para substituted phenyl acetic acid compounds
US4168385A (en) 1975-09-25 1979-09-18 American Cyanamid Company Hypolipemic phenylacetic acid derivatives
US4125732A (en) 1977-05-06 1978-11-14 American Cyanamid Company 2-Aryloxy-2-(phenoxyalkoxy)phenyl acetic acid and esters
US4820715A (en) 1984-06-28 1989-04-11 Bristol-Myers Company Anti-emetic quinuclidinyl benzamides
US4748272A (en) 1986-08-01 1988-05-31 Rorer Pharmaceutical Corp. Phenoxyphenylacetates for use as potential modulators of arichidonic acid pathways
US5059610A (en) 1987-11-03 1991-10-22 Rhone-Poulenc Rorer Pharmaceuticals Inc. Quinoline derivatives and their use as antagonists of leukotriene d4
US5177095A (en) 1990-02-13 1993-01-05 Merck & Co., Inc. Triazole angiotensin II antagonists incorporating a substituted benzyl element
US5183810A (en) 1990-02-13 1993-02-02 Merck & Co., Inc. Imidazole angiotensin II antagonists incorporating a substituted benzyl element
US5264439A (en) 1990-02-13 1993-11-23 Merck & Co., Inc. Quinazolinone, triazolinone and pyrimidinone angiotensin II antagonists incorporating a substituted benzyl element
US5449682A (en) 1990-02-13 1995-09-12 Merck & Co., Inc. Angiotensin II antagonists incorporating a substituted benzyl element
US5240938A (en) 1991-02-13 1993-08-31 Merck & Co., Inc. Angiotensin II antagonists incorporating a substituted pyridoimidazolyl ring
US5519138A (en) 1991-07-15 1996-05-21 Dr. Karl Thomae Gmbh Phenylalkyl derivatives, with pharmaceutical activity
US5401745A (en) 1993-03-19 1995-03-28 Merck & Co., Inc. Quinazolinones substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
US5334598A (en) 1993-03-19 1994-08-02 Merck & Co., Inc. Six-membered ring fused imidazoles substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
US5668176A (en) 1993-03-19 1997-09-16 Merck & Co. Inc. Phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
US5374638A (en) 1993-03-19 1994-12-20 Merck & Co., Inc. Six membered ring fused imidazoles substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives used to treat asthma
US5420133A (en) 1993-03-19 1995-05-30 Merck & Co., Inc. Quinazolinones substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
EP0617001A1 (en) 1993-03-19 1994-09-28 Merck & Co. Inc. Phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
US5565485A (en) 1993-03-19 1996-10-15 Merck & Co., Inc. Biphenyl compounds useful or endothelin antagonists
US5767310A (en) 1993-03-19 1998-06-16 Merck & Co., Inc. Phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
WO1995003044A1 (en) 1993-07-20 1995-02-02 Merck & Co., Inc. Benzimidazolinones substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
US5391566A (en) 1993-07-20 1995-02-21 Merck & Co., Inc. Benzimidazolinones substituted with phenoxyphenylacetic acid derivatives
US5538991A (en) 1994-09-14 1996-07-23 Merck & Co., Inc. Endothelin antagonists bearing 5-membered heterocyclic amides
US5559135A (en) 1994-09-14 1996-09-24 Merck & Co., Inc. Endothelin antagonists bearing pyridyl amides
WO1996009818A1 (en) 1994-09-27 1996-04-04 Merck & Co., Inc. Endothelin receptor antagonists for the treatment of emesis
US5596124A (en) 1994-12-09 1997-01-21 American Cyanamid Company Method for safening herbicides in cereal crops using 5-aryloxy-1,2-(disubstituted)benzene compounds
US5821256A (en) 1995-08-16 1998-10-13 Merck Patent Gesellschaft Mit Beschrankter Haftung Endothelin receptor antagonists
WO1997021700A1 (en) 1995-12-12 1997-06-19 Merck & Co., Inc. Process for the preparation of an endothelin antagonist
US5708186A (en) 1995-12-12 1998-01-13 Merck & Co Inc Stereoselective process
US5688974A (en) 1995-12-12 1997-11-18 Merck & Co., Inc. Process for the preparation of an endothelin antagonist
WO1997021693A1 (en) 1995-12-12 1997-06-19 Merck & Co., Inc. Stereoselective process
US5994356A (en) 1996-04-10 1999-11-30 Karl Thomae Carboxylic acid derivatives, medicaments comprising these compounds, their use and processes for their production
WO1998055454A2 (en) 1997-06-05 1998-12-10 Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Benzofurans and benzothophenes as suppressors of neurodegeneration
WO1999058521A1 (en) 1998-05-12 1999-11-18 American Home Products Corporation 11-aryl-benzo[b]naphtho[2,3-d]furans and 11-aryl-benzo[b]naphtho[2,3-d]thiophenes useful in the treatment of insulin resistance and hyperglycemia
WO1999058519A1 (en) 1998-05-12 1999-11-18 American Home Products Corporation Phenyl oxo-acetic acids useful in the treatment of insulin resistance and hyperglycemia
US6110963A (en) 1998-05-12 2000-08-29 American Home Products Corporation Aryl-oxo-acetic acids useful in the treatment of insulin resistance and hyperglycemia
WO2000074666A2 (en) 1999-06-04 2000-12-14 Metabolex, Inc. Use of (-) (3-trihalomethylphenoxy) (4-halophenyl) acetic acid derivatives for treatment of insulin resistance, type 2 diabetes, hyperlipidaemia and hyperuricaemia
WO2002044113A2 (en) 2000-11-28 2002-06-06 Metabolex, Inc. Use of(-) (3-halomethylphenoxy) (4-halophenyl) acetic acid derivatives for treatment of insulin resistance, type 2 diabetes, hyperlipidemia and hyperuricemia

Non-Patent Citations (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
D. Pitre, et al, "Mezzi Di Contrasto Radiologici", II Farmaco-Ed. C.-vol. 27-No. 5, 1972, pp. 408-418.
Daljit S. Shanoa, et al, "(Dipropylphenoxy)phenylacetic Acids: A New Generation of Nonpeptide Angiotensin II Receptor Antagonist", J. Med. Chem. 1993, 36, 3738-3742.
G. Tilly, "Synthese de nouveaux moyens de contraste radiologiques pour la cholecystographie", Chimie Therapeutique, 1967, pp. 57-65.
Giuseppe Campiani, et al, "Pyrrolobenzothiazepinones and Pyrrolobenzoxazepinones: Novel and Specific Non-Nucleoside HIV-1 Reverse Transcriptase Inhibitors with Antiviral Activity", J. Med. Chem. 1996, 39, 2672-2680.
H. Cassebaum, et al "Neue intravenos applizierbare Gallenkontrastmittel", pp. 470-474, 1967.
Holly T. Beauchamp, et al, "In Vivo Receptor Occupancy of the Angiotensin II Receptor by Nonpeptide Antagonists: Relationship to In Vitro Affinities and In Vivo Pharmacologic Potency", JPET, vol. 272, No. 2, 612-618. 1995.
JP, CAPLUS 1987:439422.
JP, HCAPLUS 1979:566381.
JP, HCAPLUS 1989:75063.
JP, HCAPLUS 1999:572043.
Shamina M. Rangwala, et al, "Stereoselective Effects of Chiral Clofibric Acid Analogs on Rat Peroxisome Proliferator-Activated Receptor alpha (rPPARalpha) Activation and Peroxisomal Fatty Acid Beta-Oxidation" Chirality 9:37-47 (1997).
T.C. Asthana, et al, "Alpha-Phenoxy- & Thiophenoxyphenylacetic Acid Derivatives as Hypoglycaemic Agents", 1970, pp. 1086-1095, vol. 8, Indian Journal of Chemistry.
Thomas F. Walsh, et al, "Potent Dual Antagonists of Endothelin and Angiotensin II Receptors Derived from alpha-Phenoxyphenylacetic Acids (Part III)", 1995, pp. 1155-1158, vol. 5, No. 11, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters.

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008030604A2 (en) 2006-09-08 2008-03-13 Rhode Island Hospital Treatment, prevention, and reversal of alcohol-induced brain disease
US9308198B2 (en) 2006-09-08 2016-04-12 Rhode Island Hospital Treatment, prevention, and reversal of alcohol-induced brain disease

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2002064094A2 (en) 2002-08-22
EP1366012A4 (en) 2005-11-02
AU2002251978B2 (en) 2007-07-19
CA2437118A1 (en) 2002-08-22
JP2004521124A (en) 2004-07-15
WO2002064094A3 (en) 2003-06-12
US20040092596A1 (en) 2004-05-13
US20060122242A1 (en) 2006-06-08
US7495020B2 (en) 2009-02-24
EP1366012A2 (en) 2003-12-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7091230B2 (en) 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders
AU784722B2 (en) Aryloxyacetic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders
US6645997B2 (en) Benzopyrancarboxylic acid derivatives for the treatment of diabetes and lipid disorders
US6569879B2 (en) Aryloxyacetic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders
US7393960B2 (en) Indoles having anti-diabetic activity
AU2001277056B2 (en) N-substituted indoles useful in the treatment of diabetes
AU2002251978A1 (en) 2-aryloxy-2-arylalkanoic acids for diabetes and lipid disorders
US6713508B2 (en) Benzopyrancarboxylic acid derivatives for the treatment of diabetes and lipid disorders
US7625933B2 (en) Indoles having anti-diabetic activity
US7297715B2 (en) PPAR alpha selective compounds for the treatment of dyslipidemia and other lipid disorders
AU2005206540B2 (en) Antidiabetic oxazolidinediones and thiazolidinediones
US7629372B2 (en) Compounds for the treatment of dyslipidemia and other lipid disorders
US7524882B2 (en) PPAR alpha selective compounds for the treatment of dyslipidemia and other lipid disorders
US7807692B2 (en) Antidiabetic oxazolidinediones and thiazolidinediones
US20090069385A1 (en) Antidiabetic Oxazolidinediones and Thiazolidinediones

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: MERCK & CO., INC., NEW JERSEY

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:ADAMS, ALAN D.;JONES, A. BRIAN;BERGER, JOEL P.;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:017064/0355;SIGNING DATES FROM 20020312 TO 20020313

AS Assignment

Owner name: MERCK SHARP & DOHME CORP., NEW JERSEY

Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:MERCK & CO., INC.;REEL/FRAME:023861/0349

Effective date: 20091102

REMI Maintenance fee reminder mailed
LAPS Lapse for failure to pay maintenance fees
STCH Information on status: patent discontinuation

Free format text: PATENT EXPIRED DUE TO NONPAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEES UNDER 37 CFR 1.362

FP Lapsed due to failure to pay maintenance fee

Effective date: 20100815